BS-400 (v5 0)

BS-400/BS-420
Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
© 2008-2010 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights
Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2010-04 (Version: 5.0).
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual.
This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not
convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others.
Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or
other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this

manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly
forbidden.
, , , , , are the
registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries.
All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes
without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in
the condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this

product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams,
calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified technician to maintain
and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user serviceable.
i
WARNING:
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this

equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan.
Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human
health.
NOTE:
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained

and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the
use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than
Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or

accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to
Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:
Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain
a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must
appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be
accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model
number, serial number, and a brief description of the reason for return.
Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product
is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department.
ii
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan, ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
iii
iv
Foreword
Who Should Read This Manual
This manual is geared for service personnel authorized by Mindray.
What Can You Find in This Manual

This manual covers principles, installation procedures, theories, maintenance and
troubleshooting guidelines of the system. Please service the system strictly as
instructed by this manual.
Conventions Used in This Manual

This manual uses the following typographical conventions to clarify meanings in the
text.
Bold and Italic font indicates text displayed on the screen, such as Sample
Request.
Safety Symbols
In this manual, the signal words BIOHAZARD, WARNING, CAUTION

and NOTE are used regarding safety and other important instructions. The signal
words and their meanings are defined as follows. Please understand their meanings
clearly before reading this manual.
When you see… Then…

Read the statement following the symbol. The
WARNING statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.

BIOHAZARD statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.

CAUTION statement is alerting you to a possibility of system
damage or unreliable results.

NOTE statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.
Labels Used On the System

The labels attached to the panels of the system use symbols to clarify the meaning of
the text. The chart below explains the symbols on the labels.
Serial Number
Foreword 1
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the

Council Directive Concerning In Vitro Diagnostic Medical
Devices 98/79/EC.
Authorized Representative in the European
Community
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU
member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that
this product should not be treated as household waste. By
ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent bringing potential negative consequences to
the environment and human health. For more detailed
information with regard to returning and recycling this
product, please consult the distributor from whom you
purchased the product.
In Vitro diagnostic equipment
Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection
Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Warning: risk of burn
Caution: laser radiation
Protective ground terminal
ON (Main Power)
OFF (Main Power)
ON (Power)
OFF (Power)
COM Serial Port
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste
WASTE
HIGH CONC.
High-concentration waste sensor
WASTE SENSOR
2 Foreword
LOW CONC.
High-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 1
LOW CONC.
Normal-pressure low-concentration waste
WASTE 2
DEIONIZED
Deionized water
WATER
Model:
Product model
BS-400/BS-420
Graphics
All graphics, including screens and printout, are for illustration purposes only and
must not be used for any other purpose.
EC Representative
Name: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH (Europe)
Address: Eiffestrasse 80 D-20537 Hamburg Germany
Tel: +49 40 2513174
Fax: +49 40 255726
Foreword 3
Safety Precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when using the Chemistry Analyzer.
Ignoring any of these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment
damage.
WARNING
If the system is used in a manner not specified by Mindray, the
protection provided by the system may be impaired.
Preventing Electric Shock

Please observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
WARNING
When the Main Power is on, users must not open the rear cover or side
cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the analyzer may cause equipment
failure and even electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the
analyzer. In case of spillage, switch off the power immediately, remove
the spillage.
Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by
moving parts.
WARNING
Do not touch such moving parts as sample probe, reagent probe, mixer
and wash probe, when the system is in operation.
Do not touch the sample probe or mixer while the system is in operation.
Make sure the reagent disk cover is properly installed.
Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by
photometer lamp.
WARNING
Light sent by the photometer lamp may hurt your eyes. Do not stare
into the lamp when the system is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the Main
Power and then wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp to cool down
before touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you
may get burned.
4 Foreword
Preventing Laser Radiation
Please observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by laser
radiation.
CAUTION
Light sent by the bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into
the laser beam from the bar code reader.
Preventing Infection
Please observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous
infection.
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to
biohazardous infection. Do not touch the sample, mixture or waste with
your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow
standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Handling Reagents and Wash Solution
WARNING
Reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution
are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution when using the
reagents, concentrated wash solution and enhanced wash solution. In
case your skin or clothes contact the reagents or wash solution, wash
them off with soap and clean water. In case the reagents or wash
solution spill into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an
oculist.
Treating Waste Liquids

Please observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and
personal injury caused by waste.
BIOHAZARD
Some substances in reagent, control, enhanced wash solution and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose
of them in accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of
the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Treating Waste Analyzer

Please observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
Foreword 5
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations.
Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for waste disposal.
Preventing Fire or Explosion

Please observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using the
ethanol.
6 Foreword
Precautions on Use
To use the Chemistry Analyzer safely and efficiently, please pay much attention to the
following operation notes.
Intended Use
WARNING
The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry
analyzer designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical
chemistries in serum, plasma, urine and CSF samples. Please consult
Mindray first if you want to use the system for other purposes.
To draw a clinical conclusion, please also refer to the patient’s clinical
symptoms and other test results.
Operator
WARNING
The system is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or
laboratory experimenters trained by Mindray or Mindray-authorized
distributors.
Environment
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by
this manual. Installing and operating the system in other environment
may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage.
Foreword 7
Preventing Interference by Electromagnetic Noise
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do
not install devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around
the system. Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio
transmitters in the room housing the system. Do not use other CRT
displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may
generate electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong
electromagnetic radiation (e.g. mobile phones or radio transmitters), as
these may interfere with the proper operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation
of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in
a domestic environment may cause radio interference, in which case,
you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference.
Operating the System
CAUTION
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
use of the system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment
damage or personal injury.
Before using the system for the first time, run the calibration program
and QC program to make sure the system is in proper status.
Be sure to run the QC program every time you use the system,
otherwise the result may be unreliable.
Do not open the covers of the sample disk and reagent disk when the
system is in operation.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is to be used for connection with
the operation unit only. Do not use it for other connections. Only use the
supplied cable for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the system operating
software installed. Installing other software or hardware on this computer
may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when
the system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not
use this computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals.
Do not place the Main Power to ON again within 10 seconds since
placing it to OFF; otherwise the system may enter protection status. If it
does so, switch off the Main Power and switch it on again.
8 Foreword
Maintaining the System
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to unreliable results, or even equipment damage
and personal injury.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not
too wet) cloth, soaked with mild soap solution if necessary, to clean the
surface. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol for cleaning. After
cleaning, wipe the surface with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and unplug the power cord before cleaning.
Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression into the system,
otherwise it may lead to equipment damage or personal injury.
Replacement of such major parts as lamp, photometer, sample probe,
reagent probe, mixer and syringe plunger assembly must be followed by
a calibration.
Samples
CAUTION
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin,
or suspended matter; otherwise the probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to
unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test
results, so a sample blank is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the
compositions of the samples and lead to unreliable results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the
sample open for a long period.
Some samples may not be analyzed on the system based on
parameters the reagents claim capable of testing. Consult the reagent
manufacturer or distributor for details.
Certain samples need to be processed before being analyzed by the
system. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor for details.
The system has specific requirements on the sample volume. Refer to
this manual for details.
Load the sample to correct position on the sample disk before the
analysis begins; otherwise you will not obtain correct results.
Setting up the System
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and
wavelength, follow the instructions in this manual and the package insert
of the reagents.
Foreword 9
Reagents, Calibrators and Controls
CAUTION
Use appropriate reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to performance characteristic of
the system. Consult the reagent suppliers, Mindray or
Mindray-authorized distributor for details, if you are not sure about your
reagent choice.
Store and use reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by
the suppliers. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable results or best
performance of the system.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to
unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity
period.
Perform a calibration after changing reagents. Otherwise, you may not
obtain reliable results.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to
unreliable test results. Consult the reagent manufacturer or distributor
for details.
Backing up Data
NOTE
The system can automatically store data to the built-in hard disk of the
PC. However, data loss is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical
damage of the hard disk. Mindray recommends you to regularly back up
the data to portable storage device.
Computer and Printer
NOTE
Refer to the operation manuals of computer and printer for details.
External Equipment
WARNING
External equipment connected to the system, such as PC and printer,
shall be consistent with IEC 60950, EN 60950, GB 9254 (Class B),
EN 55022 (Class B) and EN 55024.
10 Foreword
Contents
Warranty ..............................................................................................................................ii
Return Policy .......................................................................................................................ii
Foreword........................................................................................................... 1
Who Should Read This Manual.......................................................................................... 1
What Can You Find in This Manual .................................................................................... 1
Conventions Used in This Manual...................................................................................... 1
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 4
Precautions on Use ............................................................................................................ 7
Contents............................................................................................................. I
1 System Description .............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 System Components ............................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Functions .............................................................................................................. 1-3
2 System Performance and Workflow ................................................... 2-1
2.1 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 General .................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System ........................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System.......................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System .......................................................... 2-5
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation...................................................................... 2-6
2.1.6 Installation Requirements ........................................................................ 2-6
2.1.7 Optional Modules..................................................................................... 2-7
2.2 Timing Principle .................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................. 2-7
2.2.2 Timing ...................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.3 Measuring Points ..................................................................................... 2-9
3 Installation Procedures........................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Environmental Requirements ............................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Installation Requirements ..................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements.................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Power Requirements ............................................................................... 3-2
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage Requirements ............................................. 3-2
3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities ........................................ 3-4
3.2.5 Connecting Water Unit(Optional)............................................................. 3-5
3.3 Installation Procedures ......................................................................................... 3-8
3.3.1 Checking before Intallation ...................................................................... 3-8
3.3.2 Unpacking ................................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.3 Install Drawer and Air Pump .................................................................. 3-12
3.3.4 Install the Probe and the Mixing Bar...................................................... 3-15
3.3.5 Connect the System .............................................................................. 3-20
3.3.6 Check the Pressure ............................................................................... 3-21
3.3.7 System Prime ........................................................................................ 3-21
3.3.8 Fluidic unit empty................................................................................... 3-26
Contents I
3.3.9 Operation Software Installation.............................................................. 3-27
3.3.10 Run Operating Software ...................................................................... 3-29
3.3.11 System Set up & Test........................................................................... 3-30
3.3.12 Training ................................................................................................ 3-31
4 Units and Modules................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Components and Structure ...................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Installation................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2 Sample Disk Unit .................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Components and Structure ...................................................................... 4-4
4.2.3 Servicing .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 Reagent Disk Unit............................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-11
4.3.2 Components and Structure .................................................................... 4-12
4.3.3 Servicing the Reagent Disk Unit............................................................ 4-15
4.4 Reaction Disk Unit .............................................................................................. 4-21
4.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-21
4.4.3 Replacing Components and Parts ......................................................... 4-23
4.4.4 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part ........................................................ 4-23
4.4.5 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly............................................... 4-25
4.4.6 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly......................................................... 4-26
4.4.7 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly .......................................... 4-27
4.4.8 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly......................................................... 4-28
4.5 Mixer Unit............................................................................................................ 4-29
4.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-29
4.5.3 Installation.............................................................................................. 4-31
4.6 Photometric Unit ................................................................................................. 4-32
4.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-32
4.6.3 Adjustment of Photometer ..................................................................... 4-35
4.6.4 Replacing Tungsten-halogen Lamp....................................................... 4-41
4.6.5 Replacing Optical Assembly .................................................................. 4-42
4.7 Wash Unit ........................................................................................................... 4-43
4.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-43
4.7.2 Functions ............................................................................................... 4-43
4.7.3 Structure and Installation ....................................................................... 4-44
4.8 ISE Unit(optional)................................................................................................ 4-46
4.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................ 4-46
5 Hydropneumatic System ..................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Function Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System.................................................................. 5-4
5.4 Connectors ........................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Tubing ................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6 Solenoid Valves .................................................................................................. 5-22
5.7 Layout of Hydropneumatic Drawer ..................................................................... 5-23
II Contents
5.8 Structure of Air Pump Assembly ......................................................................... 5-27
5.9 Water Supply Module(optional) .......................................................................... 5-30
5.10 Key Components............................................................................................. 5-32
6 Hardware ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Safety Precautions................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3 Circuit boards........................................................................................................ 6-1
6.4 Layout of the boards ............................................................................................. 6-4
6.5 Detaching and Assembling Circuit Boards ........................................................... 6-5
6.6 Function of board.................................................................................................. 6-5
6.6.1 Control Framework .................................................................................. 6-5
6.6.2 Main Board .............................................................................................. 6-5
6.6.3 Three-disk Drive Board............................................................................ 6-6
6.6.4 Three-probe Drive Board ......................................................................... 6-8
6.6.5 Pre-amp Board ........................................................................................ 6-9
6.6.6 AD Conversion Board .............................................................................. 6-9
6.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board................................................................. 6-10
6.6.8 Level Detection Board ........................................................................... 6-11
6.6.9 Clot Detection Board.............................................................................. 6-12
6.6.10 Pump/Valve Drive Board...................................................................... 6-13
6.6.11 Reaction Disk Temperature Control Board .......................................... 6-13
6.6.12 Preheat Temperature Control Board.................................................... 6-14
6.6.13 Communication Board ......................................................................... 6-14
6.7 Power Supply Module......................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.1 Features of Power Supply Module ........................................................ 6-15
6.7.2 Block Diagram ....................................................................................... 6-16
6.8 Connection Diagram ........................................................................................... 6-19
7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts .................................. 7-1
7.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Enclosure and Panel............................................................................................. 7-1
7.3 Replacing Valves and Tanks................................................................................. 7-6
7.4 Installing Sample Syringe ................................................................................... 7-10
7.5 Installing Reagent Syringe.................................................................................. 7-11
7.6 Installing Power Supply Assembly...................................................................... 7-12
8 Service and Maintenance..................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Preparation ........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Tools......................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Wash Solution.......................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3 Others ...................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Daily Maintenance ................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes....................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe........................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Checking/Cleaning R1/R2 Probes........................................................... 8-3
8.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ........................................... 8-3
8.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water............................................... 8-3
8.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing........................................................................... 8-4
8.2.7 Checking Vacuum/Pressure Pumps ........................................................ 8-4
8.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper .............................................................. 8-5
8.2.9 ISE Unit (optional).................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.10 Checking the Drying Module ................................................................. 8-6
Contents III
8.3 Weekly Maintenance ............................................................................................ 8-8
8.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe........................................................................... 8-8
8.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes ........................................................................... 8-9
8.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers ......................................................... 8-11
8.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader Windows........................ 8-12
8.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment .................................................... 8-13
8.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment ................................................... 8-14
8.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit......................................................... 8-15
8.3.8 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes .................................................................. 8-15
8.3.9 Checking Photometer ............................................................................ 8-15
8.3.10 Checking Concentrated Wash Solution ............................................... 8-20
8.4 Two-week Maintenance...................................................................................... 8-20
8.4.1 Maintaining Hydropneumatic Components............................................ 8-20
8.5 Monthly Maintenance.......................................................................................... 8-21
8.5.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe................................................... 8-21
8.5.2 Cleaning Wash Well of R1/R2 Probes................................................... 8-22
8.5.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers ................................... 8-23
8.5.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor............................................................... 8-24
8.5.5 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes Rotors ............................................................. 8-25
8.5.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors ............................................. 8-26
8.5.7 Checking Wash Unit .............................................................................. 8-26
8.5.8 Checking Hydropneumatic Drawer........................................................ 8-30
8.5.9 Cleaning Air Filter, Oil Mist Separator, Mist Separator .......................... 8-30
8.5.10 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ................................................................ 8-30
8.6 Three-month Maintenance ................................................................................. 8-35
8.6.1 Cleaning Dust Screens .......................................................................... 8-35
8.7 Six-month Maintenance...................................................................................... 8-35
8.7.1 Replacing Lamp..................................................................................... 8-35
8.7.2 Replacing or Cleaning Air Screen.......................................................... 8-38
8.7.3 Cleaning Tanks, Floater Switch and Siphon Tube ................................. 8-38
8.7.4 Maintaining the Air Pump....................................................................... 8-38
8.7.5 Replacing Waste Tubing........................................................................ 8-39
8.7.6 Replacing First and Second Phase Washing Tubing on Wash Unit...... 8-39
8.7.7 Replacing DI Water Filter and the Tubing.............................................. 8-40
8.7.8 Replacing On-line Filters ....................................................................... 8-41
8.7.9 Wash glass cuvette (Optional)............................................................... 8-43
8.8 Yearly Maintenance ............................................................................................ 8-47
8.8.1 Maintaining the Air Pump....................................................................... 8-47
8.9 As-Needed Maintenance .................................................................................... 8-49
8.9.1 Unclogging Sample Probe ..................................................................... 8-49
8.9.2 Unclogging R1/R2 Probes ..................................................................... 8-54
8.9.3 Replacing Sample Probe ....................................................................... 8-58
8.9.4 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe................................................... 8-59
8.9.5 Replacing R1/R2 Probes ....................................................................... 8-60
8.9.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers ....................................................... 8-60
8.9.7 Replacing Syringe Plunger Assembly.................................................... 8-62
8.9.8 Removing Air Bubbles ........................................................................... 8-64
8.9.9 Replacing Reaction Cuvette .................................................................. 8-65
8.9.10 Washing Glass cuvette (Optional) ....................................................... 8-68
8.9.11 Adjust Pressure.................................................................................... 8-68
8.9.12 Replacing Check Valve........................................................................ 8-69
8.10 Maintaining ISE Module(Optional) .................................................................. 8-70
8.10.1 Replacing Reagent Pack ..................................................................... 8-70
IV Contents
8.10.2 Replacing Electrodes........................................................................... 8-71
8.10.3 Replacing Tubing ................................................................................. 8-71
8.10.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional) .................................................................. 8-72
9 Test and Maintenance Software .......................................................... 9-1
9.1 Basic Operations .................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 Logging On .............................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.2 Overview.................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.3 Operating Commands.............................................................................. 9-3
9.2 Macro Instructions .............................................................................................. 9-10
9.2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 9-10
9.2.2 Detailed Operations ............................................................................... 9-10
9.3 Performance ....................................................................................................... 9-13
9.3.1 Accuracy and Repeatability of Absorbance ........................................... 9-13
9.3.2 Stability of Absorbance .......................................................................... 9-14
9.3.3 Linearity of Absorbance ......................................................................... 9-15
9.3.4 Absorbance Accuracy and Precision of Diluted Sample ....................... 9-15
9.3.5 Residue of Cuvette ................................................................................ 9-16
9.3.6 Sampling Accuracy and Precision of Sample Probe ............................. 9-16
9.3.7 Carryover of Sample Probe ................................................................... 9-16
9.3.8 Backwater .............................................................................................. 9-17
9.3.9 Stability and Drift of Absorbance............................................................ 9-17
9.4 Parameter ........................................................................................................... 9-19
9.4.1 Detailed Operations ............................................................................... 9-19
10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 Classification of Error Messages .................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Corrective Measures ....................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit.................................................................... 10-4
10.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit .................................................................. 10-13
11 Calculation Methods .......................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Reaction Types ............................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Endpoint ............................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Fixed-time ............................................................................................ 11-5
11.1.3 Kinetic .................................................................................................. 11-8
11.1.4 QC Rule ............................................................................................. 11-14
11.2 Prozone Check.............................................................................................. 11-15
11.2.1 Antigen Addition ................................................................................. 11-16
11.2.2 Reaction Rate Method ....................................................................... 11-17
11.3 Serum Index.................................................................................................. 11-19
11.3.1 What is Serum Index.......................................................................... 11-19
11.3.2 Calculation of Serum Index................................................................ 11-20
Contents V
VI Contents
1 System Description
1.1 Overview
The system is a fully-automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer
designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum,
plasma, urine and CSF (Cerebrospinal fluid) samples. The Chemistry Analyzer
consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer) and operation unit.
Figure 1-1 Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit
1 System Description 1-1

1.2 System Components
The system has a throughput of 400 tests/hour for single- or double-reagent analysis.
Each working period is equivalent to 9 seconds. Structurally, the system realizes the
“three-disk + three-probe + two-mixer” scheme, which means one reaction disk, one
sample disk, one reagent disk, two reagent probes, one sample probe, one sample
mixer and one reagent mixer. The two reagent probes aspirate and dispense R1 and
R2, and the two mixers stir S(sample) and R2.The photometric system, which is
composed of gratings and diode array, perform photometric measurement to the
reaction cuvettes that hold sample/reagent mixture. When analysis is finished, the
wash unit cleans the reaction cuvettes during 8 phases.
Figure 1-2 Layout of the system panel
1-2 1 System Description

Figure 1-3 System structure
Wash unit
Sample mixer Reagent mixer
Sample probe
R1 probe Reaction disk
R2 probe Sample disk
Reagent disk
Hydropneumatic
assembly
1.3 Functions
The general working procedure of the system is as follows:
1. All mechanical units are initialized.
2. The reaction cuvettes are washed during 8 phases. After phase 6, water blank is
analyzed automatically.
3. The reagent disk rotates to R1 aspirate position, and R1 probe aspirates reagent
from a bottle on the reagent disk.
4. When washed for 8 phases, the reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent
dispense position, and the R1 probe rotates to the reaction disk and dispenses the
reagent to a cuvette.
5. R1 is incubated in reaction cuvette for several periods.
6. The sample disk rotates to the sample aspirate position, and the sample probe
aspirates designated amount of sample from specified sample tube.
7. The reaction cuvette with R1 dispensed rotates to the sample dispense position,
and the sample probe dispenses the sample in the reaction cuvette.
8. With sample dispensed, the reaction cuvette rotates to sample mixing position for
stirring.
9. In case of double-reagent tests, when sample is dispensed, the reagent disk

rotates to the R2 aspirate position, and the R2 probe aspirates reagent from the
specified bottle on the reagent disk.
1 System Description 1-3

10. The reaction disk with sample dispensed rotates to the R2 dispensing position,
and the R2 probe dispenses the reagent to a reaction cuvette.
11. With R2 dispensed, the reaction cuvette is carried to the reagent mixing position
for stirring.
12. During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit.
13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis

stated above. As for triple- or quadruple-reagent tests, the reaction cuvette with R2
dispensed will not be washed when passing by the wash unit.
14. The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished are washed when passing by
the wash unit.
Table 1-1 Functions of system units

Unit Name Description
Sample probe unit Aspirates and dispenses samples for all chemical
and ISE tests.
Sample Disk Unit 90 positions. Holds samples to be analyzed.
R1 probe unit Aspirates and dispenses R1 and R3 for all chemical
tests.
R2 probe unit Aspirates and dispenses R2 and R4 for all chemical
tests.
Reagent Disk Unit 80 positions. Holds bottles containing reagents and
wash solution.
Reaction Disk Unit 90 cuvette positions. It provides an environment in
which sample reacts with reagents.
Reagent mixer unit Stirs the mixture in reaction cuvette when R2 is
dispensed.
Sample mixer unit Stirs the mixture in reaction cuvette when sample is
dispensed.
Photometric Unit Performs photometric measurement (absorbance
reading) at 12 wavelengths with the gratings system.
Wash Unit Cleans reaction cuvettes during 8 phases.
ISE Unit(optional) Measures the concentration of Na+, K+, Cl- and Li+
in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
1-4 1 System Description

2 System Performance and
Workflow
2.1 Technical Specifications
2.1.1 General
System
Random, multi-channel, multi-test
System structure
Analyzing unit plus Operation unit(PC)
Sample type
Serum, urine and plasma
Number of simultaneous measurements
38 double-reagent tests/77 single-reagent tests
Throughput
400 tests/hour, or
560 tests/hour with ISE unit
Analytical method
Endpoint, Kinetic, Fixed-time;
2 System Performance and Workflow 2-1

Supporting single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests;
Supporting single-/double-wavelength tests
Reaction time
Maximum of 10 minutes
Reaction temperature
37±0.1℃
Test scope
Clinical chemistries, immunoassays, TDM (Therapeutic Drug Monitoring)
Predilution
Dilution ratio < 150. Dilution is done in reaction cuvette.
Operation mode
System and tests are configured via the operating software. Profiles and calculation
tests are allowed.
Data processing
Capable of storing and outputting various data and tables/graphs, and calculating
among different tests
Dimensions
l×b×h:1180 mm×700 mm×1145 mm.
Weight
250 kg
Emergent samples
Emergent samples can be inserted during measurement at any time.
Network connection
Able to be connected with LIS (Laboratory Information Management System)
2.1.2 Specifications for Sample System

Sample loading
Samples are loaded via the sample disk.
Sample tube type
Microtube: Φ12×37mm, Φ14×25mm;
Blood collecting tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm,
Φ13 X 75 mm, Φ13 X 95 mm, Φ13 X 100 mm;
Plastic tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13 X 75
mm, Φ13 X 95 mm, Φ13 X 100 mm.
2-2 2 System Performance and Workflow

Sample inventory
The level of samples should be higher than 5mm.
Sample disk
Ordinary sample disk, including inner, middle and outer circles
Sample positions on sample disk
90 positions, which include the positions for calibrators, contros, STAT samples and
diluted samples
STAT sample
Emergent samples can be inserted during measurement at any time and then run
with high priority.
Sample volume
2µl-45µl, with increment of 0.1µl
Sample probe
One probe, which is capable of detecting liquid level, clots and obstruction (in
horizontal and vertical directions), and of tracking liquid level
Sample probe washing
Inside and outside of the probe are washed with carryover less than 0.1%.
Sample entering mode
Bar code system, etc
Table 2-1 Specifications of sample bar code

Name Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF(interleaved 2 of 5), code128, code39,
UPC/EAN and Code93
Maximum bar 0.19mm
code density
Total length 3-27 digits
Bar code User-defined
format and
contents
Max. width of 55mm
bar code level
Min. height of 10mm
bar code label
Max. inclination ±5 degree
angle
Print quality No less than class C (ANSI MH10.8M)
Wide and 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
narrow ratio
2.1.3 Specifications for Reagent System

Reagent loading
All reagents are loaded via the reagent disk.

Reagent bar code
The reagent bar code is in conformity with the NCCLS standard and also compatible
with various application environments. The total length of reagent bar code is within
15-30 digits.
Table 2-2 Specifications of reagent bar code
Name Description
Symbology Codabar, I 2 of 5 (interleaved 2 of 5), code128, code39,
UPC/EAN and Code93
Maximum bar 0.19mm
code density
Total length 15-30 digits
Bar code User-defined
format and
contents
Max. width of 55mm
bar code level
Min. height of 10mm
bar code label
Max. ±5 degree
inclination
angle
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Wide and 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
narrow ratio
Reagent refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 4-10℃
Reagent dispensing
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringes.
Reagent types
1 to 4 reagent types, R1, R2, R3 and R4
Reagent volume
20µl-350µl, with increment of 1µl
Reagent disk
Ordinary reagent disk, including inner and outer circles, 80 positions in total
Reagent bottle
80 reagent bottles can be held on the reagent disk. Each reagent position can hold
common 100ml or 70ml bottles or Mindray outer-circle 20ml/40ml and Mindray
inner-circle 40ml/62ml bottles.
Reagent probe
Two separate probes, which are capable of detecting liquid level and obstructions (in
horizontal and vertical directions), and tracking liquid level
Reagent probe washing
Inside and outside of the probe are washed with carryover less than 0.1%.

Reagent inventory
Less than 300µl
Methods to prevent reagent carryover
User-defined. Reagent probes are washed with enhanced wash solution.
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System

Optical path of reaction cuvette
5mm
Material of reaction cuvette
5mm×5mm×30mm, semi-permanent plastic reaction cuvette
Number of reaction cuvettes
90
Stirring method
Two separate mixers, which stir samples and R2/R3/R4 respectively
Reaction liquid volume
150-360µl
Photometric system
Static fiber transmission, and reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field

gratings
Wavelength
12 wavelengths, which are 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm
Light source
12V, tungsten-halogen lamp, 50W
The light is transmitted through the fibers.
Gratings type
Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings
Wavelength accuracy
±2nm
Minimum reaction liquid volume
150µl
Photometric measurement method
Photodiode array
Number of simultaneous wavelength for each test

One or two wavelengths
Measurement range
0-3A; optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer
0.001OD
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation

Calibration method
Linear (one-point, two-point and multi-point), Logit-Log 4p, Logit-Log 5p, Spline,
Exponential, Polynomial and Parabola
Display
15” LCD
Operating system
Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP（Windows Vista is compatible）
QC(quality control) rule
Westgard multi-rule, Cumulative sum check and Twin Plot
Communication interface
RS-232
Printer
Ink jet printer, laser printer (black-white) and stylus printer
Input device
Keyboard, network
Output device
Display, printer and LIS host
Storage device
Hard disk, USB port
2.1.6 Installation Requirements

Power requirements
AC 220-240V, 50Hz, 1500VA; AC 220/230V, 60Hz, 1500VA; AC 110/115V, 60Hz,

1500VA
Water consumption
<20L/hour
Operating environment
Storage temperature: 0℃-40℃, fluctuation<±2℃/H

Storage humidity: 30%RH-80%RH, without condensation
Operating temperature: 15℃-30℃, fluctuation<±2℃/H
Operating humidity: 35%RH-80%RH, without condensation
Above-sea-level height: No less than 2000 meters
2.1.7 Optional Modules

ISE(Ion Selective Electrode) module
Waste drainage module
Water supply module
2.2 Timing Principle

2.2.1 Overview
Figure 2-1 General Test Procedure of the system
2.2.2 Timing
2.2.2.1 Timing for Sample Probe

a. Washing inside and outside of the sample probe
b. Lifting up from the wash well
c. Rotating to top of sample disk
d. Lowering down to sample tube
e. Aspirating sample and dispensing back a little
f. Lifting up from sample tube
g. Rotating to top of reaction disk
h. Lowering down to reaction cuvette

i. Dispensing sample
j. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
k. Rotating to top of wash well
l. Lowering down to wash well
→ Go to next period
2.2.2.2 Timing for R1 Probe

a. Rotating to top of reaction disk
b. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
c. Dispensing R1
d. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
e. Rotating to top of wash well
f. Lowering down to wash well
g. Washing inside and outside of the probe
h. Lifting up from the wash well
i. Rotating to top of reagent disk
j. Lowering down to reagent bottle
k. Aspirating R1
l. Lifting up from reagent bottle
2.2.2.3 Timing for R2 Probe

a. Washing inside and outside of the R2 probe
b. Lifting up from the wash well
c. Rotating to top of reagent disk
d. Lowering down to reagent bottle
e. Aspirating R2
f. Lifting up from reagent bottle
g. Rotating to top of reaction disk
h. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
i. Dispensing R2
j. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
k. Rotating to top of wash well
l. Lowering down to wash well

2.2.2.4 Timing for Reagent Mixer and Sample Mixer

a. Lifting up from the wash well
b. Rotating to top of reaction disk
c. Lowering down to reaction cuvette
d. Stirring reaction liquid
e. Lifting up from reaction cuvette
f. Rotating to top of wash well
g. Lowering down to wash well
h. Washing reagent and sample mixers
2.2.2.5 Timing for Reaction Disk

The reaction disk can hold 90 reaction cuvettes. During each period, the reaction disk
rotates clockwise, rotating and stopping for 2 times, and passes 91 cuvettes(50+41),
that is, the reaction disk finally stops at the next position of the clockwise direction.
Figure 2-2 Timing of Reaction Disk
2.2.3 Measuring Points

Figure 2-3 Measuring Points for Single-reagent tests
R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe) Reaction end
Wash Cuvette
1'52" 10'05"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 90# period

Figure 2-4 Measuring Points for Double-reagent tests
R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe)
R2(R2 probe) Reaction end
Wash cuvette
1'52" 4'30" 5'35"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 52 90# period
Figure 2-5 Measuring Points for Triple-reagent tests

R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe)
R2(R2 probe) Continue
Wash cuvette
1'52" 4'30" 5'44"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 52 90# period
Go to next cycle
R3(R1 probe)
1'24" M3(Reagent mixer)
Stop washing Reaction end

23" 11'34"
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 100 102 180# period
Figure 2-6 Measuring Points for Quadruple-reagent tests

R1(R1 probe)
S(Sample probe)
R2(R2 probe) Continue
Wash cuvette
1'52" 4'30" 5'44"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 22 52 90# period
Go to next cycle
R3(R1 probe)
1'24" R4(R2 probe)
Stop washing Reaction end

6'22" 5'35"
90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 100 142 180# period

3 Installation Procedures
3.1 Environmental Requirements

The altitude height of the installation site should be lower than 2000 meters.
The system is for indoor use only.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level with gradient less than 1/200.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to bear 350Kg weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated.
The installation site should be free of dust as much as possible.
The installation site should not be in direct sun.
The installation site should not be close to a heat or draft source.
The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
The installation site should not be disturbed by great noise or power supply.
The system should not be placed near brush-type motors and electrical contacts
that are frequently powered on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters near the system.
Electromagnetic waves generated by those devices may interfere with operation
of the system.
Ambient temperature: 15℃-30℃, with fluctuation less than ±2℃/H.
Ambient humidity: 35%RH-80%RH, without condensation.
If the temperature or relative humidity does not meet the above-mentioned

requirements, be sure to use air-conditioning equipment.
3 Installation Procedures 3-1

The analyzer should be installed near a drainage sewer.
3.2 Installation Requirements

3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements
Figure 3-1 Space and accessibility requirements
Wall
Minimum 500
Maximum 3000
Operation Unit
700
Analyzing Unit
Minimum 500
F
r
Minimum 500
o
n
1180 t
Minimum 500 Unit: mm
3.2.2 Power Requirements

Power supply: AC 220-240V, 50Hz; AC 220/230V, 60Hz; AC 110/115V, 60Hz.
Three-wire power cord and properly grounded.
The system should be connected to a properly grounded power socket.
The distance between the power socket and the system should be less than 2.5
meters.
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding may lead
to electric shock and/or equipment damage.
Be sure to connect the system to a power socket that meets the

above-mentioned requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage Requirements

Water: The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water.
Water pressure: 100~392kPa, with peak no greater than 800kPa.
Water flow: Continuous flow no less than 30L/hour, with peak no greater than
1L/minute. An internal water container (above 40L) is required for the water unit
which has a flow of 20L/hour.
Water temperature: 5-32℃.
3-2 3 Installation Procedures

The water used on the system is supplied by a wash unit or other pressure water
supply. The tubing between the inlet filter and the water unit(other pressure
water supply) must not exceed 8 meters.
Water supply module:
a. The tubing between the inlet filter and OUTLET of the water supply module
must not exceed 8 meters.
b. The tubing between the INLET port of water supply module and cover of the
deionized water tank must not exceed 10 meters.
c. The volume o the deionized water tank is 80-120L.
d. The tubing from VENT of the water supply module to the sewer must not
exceed 10m.
e. The water supply module should be placed on the ground.
The inlet filter should be placed on the ground.
The tubing from the outlet on the system to the inlet filter must not exceed 2
meters.
The system drains away the low-concentration waste directly.
The tubing from the outlet on the system to the waste sewer must not exceed 5
meters.
The waste sewer must be higher than the ground within 100mm.
Drainage module:
a. A drainage module is required if the environmental conditions for waste

discharge are not met.
b. The tubing between the outlet on analyzer and inlet of drainage module
c. The tubing between the outlet of drainage module and the sewer must not
exceed 10 meters.
d. The sewer must be within 1200mm higher than the ground.
e. The drainage module should be placed on the ground.
The high-concentration waste bucket should be placed on the ground. The

tubing between the outlet on analyzer and the high-concentration waste bucket

3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain Facilities
Figure 3-2 Standard Configuration
Water supply
91 92
with pressure
Inlet filter
95
93
Maximum
of 100mm
94
High-concentration
waste bucket
Sewer Sewer
Standard Configuration
Figure 3-3 Optional Components
Inlet filter
92
95
94
Maximum
Sewer Water supply
of 1200mm
96 97 91 93 98
VENT INLET OUTLET LOW CONC LOW CONC

WASTE1 WASTE2
OUTLET
Water supply Drainage High-concentration

module module waste bucket
Sewer Sewer
Optional Components
Figure 3-4 Connectors on Water Supply Module

(<8m) (<2m)
Floater signal cable (2m)
91 92
Inlet filter
95
High-concentration waste(2m)
Normal-pressure 1
93 low-conc.waste(5m)
94
High-pressure
Outlet
low-conc.waste(5m)

Figure 3-5 Water Supply Module and Drainage Module
Normal- High-
To water To pressure pressure Low-
To sewer supply analyzer low-conc. low-conc. conc.wast
(<10m) (<10m) (<10m) waste waste e
(<5m) (<5m) (<10m)
96 97 91
93 94 98
VENT INLET OUTLET LOW CONC LOW CONC

WASTE1 WASTE2
OUTLET
Water supply module Drainage module
3.2.5 Connecting Water Unit(Optional)

If the user employs a water unit to supply water to the analyzer, an adapter is required
to connect the irregular outlet tubing of the water unit to the inlet filter (or water supply
module) of the analyzer.
There are three types of outlet tubing for the water unit: 1/4” tubing, 1/3” tubing and
1/2” tubing. All of these three tubings are made from hard materials.
The Chemistry Analyzer provides three types of adapters, which include M22, M32
and M42. The three adapters are supplied in 2 respectively together with two pairs of
big and small stoppers.
Figure 3-6 Adapters of different sizes
If the outlet tubing of the water unit has an external diameter of 1/4”, you should use
an M22 adapter to connect the outlet tubing to the transparent 6*4 PU tubing of the
analyzer. Perform the following steps to apply the adapter:
1. Unscrew the caps from the M22 adapter.

Figure 3-7 M22 adapter
2. Thread the 6*4 PU tubing through the nut cap and make it protrude about 3-5mm
from the middle hole in the cap; then apply a small stopper on the PU tubing,
avoiding loose connection between the two tubings.
Figure 3-8 Applying tubing stopper to PU tubing
3. Thread the 1/4” outlet tubing through the middle hole of the other nut cap, making
the tubing protrude for about 3-5mm from the middle hole; and then insert the
tubing into the stopper connecting the PU tubing. Check if the outlet tubing is
connected tightly to the adpater; if not, apply a small stopper on the outlet tubing.

Figure 3-9 Applying tubing stopper to 1/4” tubing
4. Screw the adapter to the nut caps.
Figure 3-10 Connecting nut caps
5. If the outlet tubing of the water unit has an external diameter of 1/3”, you should
use an M23 adapter to connect the outlet tubing to the transparent 6*4 PU tubing
of the analyzer.
Figure 3-11 1/3” tubing

Figure 3-12 Connecting 1/3” tubing to PU tubing
3.3 Installation Procedures

3.3.1 Checking before Intallation
After understanding the installation requirements, the service engineers should go to
the installation site and check the following items.
1. Check the delivery list for acceptance.
One wooden case for main instrument
One paper box for accessories
One paper box for high concentration tank

Water inlet module and waste outlet module
2. Make one copy of original parameter configuration list as back up. The list should
be kept carefully by both the service engineer and the end user.
3.3.2 Unpacking
1. Detach the wooden case as follows.
a. Gross weight is 350 kg, totally 8 people are needed to lay the wooden case
containing the main unit on the ground. Fork truck is recommended, if possible.
b. Loosen the screws on the top cover and side cover of the wooden case.

Figure3-13 Side cover of the wooden case
Figure 3-14 Top cover of the wooden case
Figure 3-15Remove one side of the side cover
Use adjustable wrench to loosen the screws on the base. Remove the steel part.

Figure 3-16 Steel part
Use adjustable wrench to loosen the four retaining screws on the feet.
Figure 3-17Feet
Use a hex wrench or a screwdriver to rotate the feet to the highest point. Please
make sure that the diameter of the hex wrench or the screwdriver should be 5-6
mm to avoid distortion.
Figure 3-18Screws on the feet
The padding par t is fixed to the right side cover. Loosen the 2 retaining screws to
remove the padding part.

Figure 3-19 Padding part
Install the padding part to the base.
Figure 3-20 Install the padding part
Move the instrument down to the floor. Put the wooden plate and retaining screws
aside in a specified place.

Figure 3-21Move the instrument to the floor
3.3.3 Install Drawer and Air Pump

Fix the analyzer: after moving the analyzer to the installation site, rotate the four
screws of the analyzer to lift the analyzer above the floor and ensure the four feet
stand firmly on the ground.
Remove the retaining screws as shown in the following figure3 and remove the
cover.
Figure 3-22 Retaining screws on the cover
Remove the 9 screws shown in the following figure and remove the drawer
package fixing plate.

Figure 3-23 8 screws on the drawer package fixing plate and 1 screw on the drawer
handle
Pull the drawer out and check whether the drawer assembly is running smoothly
and tubings are well connected.
Figure 3-24Hydropneumatic drawer
Manually turn on the ball valve (horizontal position-on, vertical position-off).
Figure 3-25 Open the ball valve

Set the bottome cover back.
Figure 3-26 Install the bottom cover
Remove the four retaining screws of the air pump from the base plate of the frame.
Please insert the cross-head screwdriver into the bottom of the screw hole to
remove the screw. It is not necessary to elevate the analyzer to locate the screws.
Figure 3-27 Air pump fixing screws

3.3.4 Install the Probe and the Mixing Bar
Remove the package and plastics on the plate.
Take the reagent and sample probe out from the accessory. Please make sure to
put the white gasket into the mental adapter of the probes.

Figure 3-28 Gasket and probe
Remove the probe enclosure: Use both of your hands to pull the bottom of the
enclousure to both sides and lift it up.
Move the probe arm to the highest point and remove the retaining bolt and spring.
Install the probes on to the arms. Please ensure that the probe can move upward
and downward after fixed onto the retaining bolt.

Connect the Teflon tubing with the probe. Please use one hand to pinch the probe
mental adapter to avoid excessive force on the probe adapter jointing point.
Connect the probe line to the level-sensing board.
After installation is completed, ensure the stop plate is shielding the collision
sensor.

Power on the analyzer after confirming that the sample probe is not in contact with
any conductible matter (like hands).
Manual adjustment: Obeserve the D2 indicator (yellow). The D2 indicator will be

on 2 seconds after the power of the analyzer is on. Press the switch of the level
sensing board S2. D2 indicator also goes through a process of OFF-ON procedure
which indicates the adjustment is successfully completed. (During the process of
adjustment, please make sure the probe is not in contact with any conductible
matter).
Install the enclosure
Take the mixing bar out from the accessory. Move the mixer arm to the highest
vertical point.
Install the mixing bar retaining screw on the installing hole of the mixing bar. Do
not fasten it.

Fasten the retaining screw of the mixing bar. Check whether the mixing bar is vertical. If
not, reinstall it.
Check whether the sample disk and reagent disk is well installed. Check whether the
retaining screw is fastened.

3.3.5 Connect the System
Connect the tubing according to 3.2.4 Connecting Water Supply and Drain
Facilities. Please ensure that the inlet tubing of the filter is connected to the outlet of
the water machine (or water supply module), and outlet tubing to analyzer. If user
chooses to use water supply module to pump water from the water bucket, the end
connected to the bucket should be loaded with heavy adapter.
Fill concentrated wash solution: pull the drawer out and open the cap of the
concentrated wash solution A and B. Fill the bottole with 1L concentrated wash
solution. Fasten the cap.
Place the concentrated reagent box
Unscrew the cap of a new bottle of concentrated wash solution and insert the cap
assembly into the reagent box and then fasten the cap properly. Place the reagent
box onto its proper holder.
Note: the tubing of the cap assembly should be inserted to the bottom of the reagent
box vertically.
If UPS is installed, make sure it is properly grounded.
Connect the analyzer, PC, printer, water machine (or water supply module),
drainage module cable. Do not Place the Power to On.
Connect the PC with the analyzer through serial port cable.
Manually turn on the ball valve (horizontal position-on, vertical position-off).

3.3.6 Check the Pressure
Before checking the pressure, please ensure the water supply is connected and the
water level reaches high level.
First click Establish pressure and vacuum. Wait for 30 seconds until the
pressure is stable to enter the pressure curve display screen. Check whether the
pressure of 25PSI, 10PSI, 5PSI and VACUUM are stable.
Figure 3-1 Establish pressure and vacuum
Please refer to table 5-4 for normal range.
3.3.7 System Prime

Before executing System Prime, make sure the water level reaches high level.
1、Prime the water tank and the external of the five probes
Select Wash/Prime water tank and probe exits and click Execute. The system will prime the
water tank and the external of the five probes. It will take about 2 minutes for the whole
procedure to be completed. Since the water flow is very small, please check whether the water
flows out in the wash well carefully. Note: no water flows out in the wash unit.

Figure 3-2 Prime the water tank and the external of the five probes
2、Prime the interior of the three probes
Use the test and maintenance software to move the probes to the wash well. Click
the following area (indicated in red circle) to turn on the SV02, SV03 and SV04. When
the water flows out of the probes stably, turn off the solenoid vavles.
Note: While priming the probes, please ensure all the covers are in the right place to
avoid splash. If splash happens, clear it with clean paper.

Figure 3-3 Prime the interior of the three probes
3、Prime the concentrated wash solution

Select Concentrated wash pirme and click Execute. The system will prime the
concentrated wash solution, which will take about 2 minutes. When the concentrated
wash solution reaches high level, the prime is completed.
Figure 3-4 Prime the concentrated wash solution
4. Prime the diluted wash solution

Select Diluted wash pirme and click Execute. The system will prime the diluted
wash solution. When the diluted wash solution reaches high level, the prime is
completed.

Figure 3-5 Prime the diluted wash solution
5、Prime auto wash

Click Mechinical reset in Main unit. When resetting is completed, remove the
wash unit from the system and place it into a container (vol>300ml). Enter the Liquid
unit of the software. Turn on the SV06, SV07, SVV13, SVV30, SVV21. When water
can flow stably from the 1-6 probes of the wash unit, turn off these solenoid vavles.
Clear the tips of these probes and intall the wash unit back onto the system. Click
Auto wash prime in Fluidic unit, and click Execute. The system will prime the wash
unit until completion.
Execute mechanical resetting
Figure 3-6 Execute mechanical resetting
Turn on&turn off SV06, SV07, SVV10, SVV20, SVV21.

Figure 3-7 Turn on solenoid valves
Figure 3-8 Prime auto wash
Click Mechnical reset in Main unit to execute the mechanical resetting to

observe the whether the movement is normal: The five probes first rise to the vertical
home position and then rotates to the horizontal home position. The thress probes will
execute washing above the wash well and then drop down to the wash well to wash
( check whether flow out from the wash well). The mixing bar lowers down to the
wash well to wash. The wash unit rises to the vertical home position. When the
movement of the five probes is completed, the three disks began to rotate. After
locating the home position, the disk will rotate to the specified position, which means
the 90# cuvette will stop at the first phase probe of the wash unit and the 1# position
of the reagent disk will stop at the R1 probe aspiration position.

3.3.8 Fluidic unit empty
1. Primary Vaccum Tank
Click Release pressure and vacuum in Fluidic unit. Upon completion, click Primary
vaccum tank drainage. It will take 30 seconds to complete the emptying procedure.
If the primary vacuum container can not be completely emptied the first time, click
Primary vaccum tank drainage again.
2. Primary pressure container

Click Establish pressure and vacuum. After the procedure is completed, check
whether the pressure is normal in Fluidic pressure curve. Click Drain
condensation moisture in Fluidic unit. It will take 25 seconds for the procedure to be
completed. If the primary container can not be emptied the first time, click Drain
condensation moisture again.
3. Empty high and low concentration waste tank
Enter the Fluidic unit of the software and turn on the SV11, SV12, SV15, which will
take 10 seconds. Check whether the high and low concentration tank is emptied. If
yes, turn off the SV11, SV12, SV15.
3.3.9 Operation Software Installation

1. Install MSDE database
Turn on the computer. Access folder “MSDE” in system software Installation program,
Double click icon as below to start installation.
2. Install the operating software
a) Double-click installation icon named “setup” as below:

b) Click ”Next” to the next step, make sure 10G space is available on the target
disk. Then click “Next”.
c) Click the “Install” button.

d) Select the default language. Then software installation is completed.
3. Install the driver and connect the printer.
3.3.10 Run Operating Software

1. Access software with user name: Admin, password: MINDRAY.

2. Set one test as “water”, apply one test (water acts as both sample and reagent)
and duplicates 90 times, check the 90 reaction cuvettes carefully, make sure all
reaction cuvettes are in good condition.
3.3.11 System Set up & Test

1. Finish test, reagent and calibrator settings on the Setup, Reagent and Calibration
screens, and then conduct a double-reagent blank.
2. Request for calibration and samples after editing them, and then debug the results.
3. After debugging the results, fill them in the table below.
Test ALT CREA BUN

Target value
2sd range
Test value 1
Test value 2
Test value 3
Test value 4
Test value 5
Test value 6
Test value 7
Test value 8
Test value 9
Test value 10

3.3.12 Training
Can you complete daily tests? Yes □ No □
Are you familiar with the test methods such as kinetic, two-point, endpoint?
Yes □ No □
Are you familiar with the daily, weekly and monthly maintenance and relevant
maintenance methods? Yes □ No □
Are you skilled in cleaning, washing and replacing the probe and mixing bar?
Yes □ No □
Are you skilled in replacing the lamp? Yes □ No □
Do you know the positions, roles and preparation methods of acid and alkaline
detergents and diluents? Yes □ No □

4 Units and Modules
4.1 Sample/Reagent Probe Unit
4.1.1 Introduction
The sample/reagent probe unit consists of the sample probe, R1 probe and R2 probe
assemblies, which are often called Three-probe Assembly.
The sample probe assembly includes a sample probe, which aspirates sample from
the sample tube and then dispenses it into reaction cuvette. The R1/R2 probe
assembly includes R1 probe and R2 probe, which respectively aspirate R1/R3 and
R2/R4 and then dispense them into reaction cuvettes.
Generally, all of the three probes are capable of detecting liquid level and
obstructions in the horizontal and vertical directions.
Additionally, the probes are also able to limit their mechanical motions or lock
themselves when power failure occurs.
The general workflow of the Three-probe Assembly is as follows:
1. Sample probe assembly: Wash wellSample aspirate positionSample

dispense position on reaction disk/ISE sample entry port;
2. Reagent probe assembly: Wash wellReagent aspirate positionReagent

dispense position on reaction disk.
4.1.2 Components and Structure

The Three-probe Assembly consists of the drive part and the probe arms. See Figure
4-1.
The drive part supports the probe arm and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the sample probe and reagent probes move among different
positions.
The drive part includes the horizontal movement structure and vertical movement
structure. Both structures have stepper motors, synchronous belt wheel and
synchronous belt. Integrated with a bracket, the two structures finally drive vertically
or horizontally the probe arm via the spline shaft.
4 Units and Modules 4-1

The probe arms are composed of the sample/reagent probes, liquid level detection
board, arm cover, etc, which are integrated by the arm base.
Besides the structural difference, the three probe assemblies differ from each other in
the upper motor plate and also the horizontal and vertical sensors. See Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-1 Probe assembly
Figure 4-2 Differences among the three probe assemblies
(a)
4-2 4 Units and Modules

(b)
(c)
(a) Sample probe assembly (b) R1 probe assembly (c) R2 probe assembly

4.1.3 Installation
Figure 4-3 Installation of three probe assemblies
4.2 Sample Disk Unit

4.2.1 Introduction
The sample disk assembly holds the sample tubes and carries them to specified
positions for sample aspiration.
a. Holding sample tubes: Sample containers (tube, microtube, etc) with samples
are placed on the sample disk, and then the sampling structure aspirates
sample and dispenses them into reaction cuvette.
b. Timely feeding: The sample disk must carry specified sample tube to the
aspirate position for aspiration according to the predefined timing. The sample
disk is driven by the drive part.
c. Sample identification: The sample disk must be able to identify the samples
automatically. This function is achieved by the bar code reader system.

The sample disk unit consists of the sample disk, drive part, sample compartment
and bar code reader.

Figure 4-4 Sample disk assembly on the analyzer
Sample disk: The sample disk holds the samples and in conjunction with the drive
part carries them to the aspirate position. Driven by the drive part, the sample disk
rotates around its axis.
Drive part: The drive part drives the sample disk to carry samples timely to the
aspirate position. During operation, the motor drives the axis to rotate via the
synchronous belt.
Bar code reader: The bar code reader identifies the samples correctly by scanning
the bar code label on sample tubes.
Sample compartment: The sample compartment is used to shield the light beam
sent from the bar code reader and separate the sample disk from other components.
4.2.3 Servicing
The location of the sample disk in the whole unit is shown in Figure 4-4.
4.2.3.1 Installing the Sample Disk Assembly

1. Structure and functions of sample disk assembly
See Figure 4-5.The sample disk assembly is compose of upper sample disk, lower
sample disk, tube rack, tube holder, handle and axis. Driven by the stepper motor and
synchronous belt, the sample disk rotates clockwise, carrying the sample tubes to the
aspirate position according to predefined timing. Then the sample probe aspirates
certain volume of sample and dispenses it into corresponding reaction cuvette.

2. Installation
a. Fix the handle to the silk-sided sample disk using two M4X12 cross pan head
screws. (Torque: 8-11kgf·cm)
b. Screw the four alignment pins to the upper sample disk. (Torque: 8-11kgf·cm)
c. Identify the two sides of the lower sample disk(The screw hole on reversed side
is protruded). Install the 90 tube racks to the obverse side of the lower disk, and
then secure the four alignment pins using four M3×8 socket head screws.
(Torque: 4.2-5.2kgf·cm)
Figure 4-5 Structure of the sample disk assembly
d. Install the tube holders on the upper sample disk and ensure they are clicked in
place.
e. Set the sample disk components on the drive part from top to down, ensuring
the pins on the drive part are aligned correctly to the holes on upper sample
disk.
f. Tighten the spring screws on the upper sample disk.

4.2.3.2 Installing/Removing Sample Disk Drive Part
The sample disk drive part is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 4-6 Structure of sample disk drive/motor assembly
1. Replacing motor
a. Unplug the motor cables.
b. Loosen the four M4×12 socket head screws that fix the motor on the mounting
plate.
c. Push the motor and remove the synchronous belt from the smaller belt wheel.
d. Remove the four M4×12 socket head screws that fix the motor, then remove the
motor and mounting plate.
e. Install the smaller belt wheel on a reliable motor and ensure the belt wheel is
installed at a height specified in Figure 4-7. (Add lock glue to the two M4×8 socket
head screws. Torque: 1.2N·m)
f. Fix the motor to the mounting plate using four M4×12 socket screws with plain
washer. (Torque: 2.0 N·m)
g. Install the motor mounting plate to the supporting rod using four M4×12 socket
screws with plain washer and spring washer. Please note not to tighten the screws
now.
h. Adjust the synchronous belt to the tension of 0.19-0.2Kgf.

i. Use a wrench to tighten the four M4×12 socket head screws with torque of 2.0N·m.
j. Connect the motor cable.
Figure 4-7 Installation requirements for sample disk drive assembly
2. Removing Sample Disk Drive Part
a. Remove the synchronous belt from the motor. See steps a-c in 1. Replacing
motor.
b. Unplug the cables from the home position sensor and disk coder.
c. Use a wrench to remove the three M3×8 socket head screws, and then remove the
coder sensor bracket from the base plate of the analyzer.
d. Use a wrench to remove the four M5×20 socket head screws from the base plate,
and then remove the sample disk bearing upwards. Remove the components of the
drive assembly according to Figure 4-6.
3. Installing sample disk bearing assembly
a. Use three M5×20 socket head screws with plain washer to fix the sample disk
bearing to the base plate of the analyzer. (Torque: 4.0N·m). Please note not to touch
the sensor.
b. Adjust the synchronous belt according to steps g-i in 1. Replacing motor.
c. Use three M3×8 socket head screws to fix the sensor to the base plate and then
connect the sensor cable.
d. Connect the motor cable.

Figure 4-8 Structure of the sensor assembly
4. Replacing sensor
a. Unplug the home position sensor cable (BA40-21-61760) and disk coder sensor
cable (BA40-21-61761).
b. Use a wrench to remove the three M3×8 socket head screws that fix the coder
sensor bracket to the base plate, and then remove the coder sensor bracket.
c. Replace the coder sensor.
d. Use three M3×8 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the coder
sensor to the base plate of the analyzer.
e. Connect the sensor cable.
4.2.3.3 Installing/Removing Sample Bar Code Assembly

(including sample compartment)
The location of the sample bar code reader and compartment is shown in Figure 4-4.
1. Installing Sample Bar Code Assembly(including sample compartment)
a. Place two sponge cushions to two sides of the glass window. Please note not to
contaminate the glass window. Stick a sponge adjusting spacer to the dust shield and
ensure the spacer is aligned to the corresponding hole on the dust shield.
b. Place the prepared glass window in the groove of the sample compartment and
secure it with the dust shield, then tighten them with four M3×8 cross pan head
screws.
c. Use two M3×8 cross pan head screws to fix the conductive brush to the sample
compartment.
d. Use two M4×16 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the sample
compartment to the upper-front beam(see Figure 4-4), and connect the conductive
brush to the upper-front beam. Be sure to align the sample compartment to the drive

shaft and prevent the sponge spacer from shielding the light entrance of the bar code
reader.
Figure 4-9 Sample bar code assembly and sample compartment
e. Install the sample bar code assembly according to Figure 4-9. Use three M5×16
socket head screws with plain/sponge washers to fix the sample bar code assembly
to the base plate (See Figure 4-4). Connect the bar code reader cable and fix it to its
bracket.
f. Fix the sample disk components to the drive part, and place the bar code fixture on
position 53 of the sample disk (See Figure 4-10).
g. Check the connection of all cables on the analyzer and then switch on the power
supply. The system resets mechanically. Then the sample bar code reader emits light
beams. Be sure not to stare into the light beams. Otherwise your eyes may get hurt.
h. Adjust the sample bar code reader properly so that the light beam from it can pass
through the gap on the fixture. Use four M3×8 socket head screws to secure the bar
code reader to the two adjusted directions.
i. Install the front panel and front plate 1 successively, and then cap the sample disk.
2. Removing Sample Bar Code Assembly
a. Remove the sample disk cover, and then remove the front plate 1 and front panel.
b. Unplug the cable of the sample bar code reader.

Figure 4-10 Adjusting sample bar code reader
c. Loosen the three M5×16 socket head screws and then remove the sample bar
code assembly.
3. Replacing Sample Bar Code Reader
a. Remove the sample disk cover, and then remove the front plate 1 and front panel.
b. Unplug the cable of the sample bar code reader and loosen the clip. Loosen the
two M5×16 socket head screws and then remove the sample bar code reader.
c. Use two M5×16 socket head screws with plain/sponge washers to secure a new
sample bar code reader to the bracket.
d. Adjust the sample bar code reader according to steps e, h, g and f in 1. Installing
Sample Bar Code Assembly(including sample compartment) .Please note not to
shield the light entrance of bar code reader with the sponge spacer.
e. Install the front panel and front plate 1 successively, and then cap the sample disk.
4.3 Reagent Disk Unit
4.3.1 Introduction
1. The reagent disk unit is capable of refrigerating and keeping the reagents at 4-10
℃ in 24 hours a day, so that the reagents are always steady and will not volatile.
2. The reagent disk is driven by the drive module and rotates clockwise or
counterclockwise, carrying each reagent bottle to the aspirate position.
3. A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information automatically.

Table 4-1 Components of reagent disk unit
Name Functions Operation
Reagent disk Holds reagent bottles and rotates Rotates clockwise
assembly clockwise or counterclockwise, or counterclockwise
carrying each reagent bottle to the
aspirate position for reagent
aspirating.
Reagent Provides refrigeration function and
refrigeration keeps the reagents in a
module low-temperature environment, so that
the reagents are always steady and
will not volatile.
Reagent disk Drives the reagent disk to rotate Rotates
drive module
Reagent bar code Inputs reagent information Scans the bar code
assembly automatically labels on reagent
bottles
The reagent disk unit consists of reagent disk module, reagent refrigeration module,
and reagent disk drive module and bar code assembly. See Figure 4-11.
The reagent disk module is used to hold reagent bottles and rotates clockwise or
counterclockwise, carrying each reagent bottle to the aspirate position for reagent
aspirating. The reagent disk module includes the handle, reagent bottles, bottle
holder and reagent disk base.
The reagent refrigeration module is used to provide refrigeration function and keep
the reagents in a low-temperature environment, so that the reagents are always
steady and will not volatile. The reagent refrigeration module is composed of
refrigeration compartment, heated layer, refrigerating plate, insulation layer, radiator,
mounting plate, adjusting plate and the upper/lower air ducts.
The drive module consists of motors, belt wheel, synchronous belt, coder, sensor,
bearing assembly fixed axis, bearing assembly shaft and sleeve.
A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information automatically. The
reagent bar code assembly is composed of the bar code reader and the anti-fog
device.

Figure 4-11 Structure of reagent disk unit
The system employs semiconductor refrigeration, which is cool wind plus air duct.
The refrigeration compartment has inner diameter of Ø444mm and outer diameter of
484mm. The refrigeration board is 10mm thick. From the bottom of the compartment
protrudes four ridges(height: 6mm), which are attached to the refrigeration plates
closely. The radiator is fixed to the bottom of the heated layer via springs and
mounting plates, and secures the refrigerating plate, which is pressed to the
refrigeration ridges and controlled by a spring. Below the heated layer embeds
screws to fix the mounting plates, isolating the refrigeration board from the outside.
There are two special air ducts located on two sides of the base plate to reject heat.
The Microscan MS-3 LASER reader (single-line, low density and lateral) is employed
on the system in view of its bar code type, density, depth of field and functions
comparing with all bar code readers in China and foreign countries.

Figure 4-12 Structure of bar code reader
If the light beams of the bar code reader are emitted not in a specific angle to the
surface of bar code label, the emitted light is in the same direction with the reflected
light. If the reflected light is too strong, it may affect the scanning performance of the
bar code reader. Therefore, the reflected light must be weakened. The isolation glass
should be inclined in certain angle with the normal line, so that the reflected line (light
3 in following figure) cannot reach the bar code reader. The installation angle of the
isolation glass is adjustable from 0° to 30° and th erefore be determined to be 5°.
Figure 4-13 Light beams from bar code reader

The anti-fog device of the reagent bar code assembly is used to heat the glass
surface of the reader to above dew point, thus preventing the glass surface from
fogging.
4.3.3 Servicing the Reagent Disk Unit

The following figure shows the reagent disk unit on the analyzer.
Figure 4-14 Reagent disk unit on the analyzer

Figure 4-15 Exploded view of reagent disk unit
Installation of modules:
The reagent disk module includes the handle, reagent bottles, bottle holder and
reagent disk base. See Figure 4-15.
Installation procedure:
1. Use two M4×12 cross pan head screws to fix the two handles to the reagent disk
bracket.
2. Use four M4×8 cross pan head screws to fix the reagent disk bracket to the
base.
3. Place the 40 bottle holders on the reagent disk base.
Precautions:
See the figure below. The reagent disk base should be installed with the un-grooved
side upwards.

Figure 4-16 Structure of reagent disk module
The reagent refrigeration module is composed of refrigeration compartment, heated

layer, refrigerating plate, insulation layer, radiator, mounting plate, adjusting plate,
insulate sponge, radiator and the upper/lower air ducts.
1. Put the reagent compartment upside down. Fix the rubber cushion and
condensation tubing connector with four M3×12 cross pan head screws; apply
water-proof glue in the circumference of the refrigeration connector; remove the nut
and spring washer from the temperature sensor connector and use a transparent
rubber washer instead; use the reagent compartment thermistor fixture (BA40-J09) to
guide through the sensor and tighten it, then apply some water-proof glue in the
circumference of the sensor.
2. Apply conducting gels (0.1-0.2mm in thickness) to the surface of the 4 bosses at

the bottom of the refrigerating compartment. Put two insulated sponges inside the
compartment. Put the refrigeration plate with the side with characters facing
downward on the bosses. Gently press it until secure. Guide the line out through the
outlet. Apply a piece of heat film on to side without characters of the refrigeration
plate.
3. Put the two radiators into the compartment. And put 4 rectangular spinal springs
SWF22-25 into its holes. Put four radiator retaining nuts (add some nut gel) through
the rectangular spinal springs and fix them onto the refrigeration compartment. Finally,
apply some water-proof glue in the circumferences of the two joints.
4. Use 5 M4X8 socket head screws with plain/spring washers to fix the compartment
fixing plate on to the bottle of the refrigeration compartment.
5. Adjust the refrigeration compartment. Fill the scanning window waterproof cushion
into the square groove around the refrigeration compartment.
6. When bar code scanner is installed, use four M3X10 cross and chamfer head nuts
to fix the defogging devices onto the side surface of the refrigeration compartment
and then use four M3X6 cross and pan head nuts to fix the dust screen onto the fixing

plate; when bar code scanner is not installed, use four M3X12 cross and pan head
nuts to fix the reagent disk cover assembly onto the refrigeration compartment.
7. Put the reagent refrigeration compartment onto the air duct and adjust the position
with fixture. Use 6 M4X8 socket head screws with with plain/spring washers to fix it
onto the air duct. Install the seal circle into the groove of the compartment.
Precautions:
1. Proper screws should be used. Stainless screws are required.
2. The refrigeration plate should be installed in correct direction; otherwise it

cannot refrigerate as expected.
3. Do not reverse the reagent compartment until the gel has been applied for 2
hours, otherwise the gel might flow out.
4. Do not use the assembly until it has been 6 hours since the completion of
installation.
Figure 4-17 Structure of refrigeration module
The refrigeration module drives the reagent disk and consists of motors, belt wheel,
synchronous belt, coder, sensor, bearing assembly fixed axis, bearing assembly shaft
and sleeve.
1. Use the three-axis bearing fixture(BA30-J04) to press the bearing to

corresponding position on lower end of the bearing assembly fixed axis.
2. Hammer the A5×10 and A4×16 cylindrical pins to corresponding holes on the
bearing assembly, and integrate the bearing assembly shaft with the fixed axis,
then press 6004 bearing to the corresponding position on the shaft.

3. Sleeve stop washer to the threaded part of the fixed axis, then screw M20
retaining nut to the tension degree that the bearing can rotate freely and the stop
washer can clip to the gap on the retaining nut.
4. Insert an A4×16 cylindrical pin to the bigger belt wheel; use six M3×8 cross pan
head screws to connect the coder and belt wheel, and then tighten the coder to
the bearing shaft with six M4×16 socket head screws with plain/spring washer.
Precautions:
1. The bearing assembly should be installed correctly.
2. The end of cylindrical pin should be level to the lower end of the bearing shaft.
3. The bearing shaft should not be blocked or moved up and down abnormally.
4. Screws should be installed properly, and the coder should be assembled

correctly and not deformed.
Figure 4-18 Structure of reagent disk drive module
A reagent bar code reader is provided to input reagent information automatically. The
reagent bar code assembly is composed of the bar code reader and the anti-fog
device.

1. Use two M3×8 socket head screws with plain/spring washer to fix the small
bracket of reader to the large support. Be sure to guide the screws through the
middle holes.
2. Install the reader to the small bracket and secure it with two M3×8 socket head
screws with plain/spring washer.
Precautions:
1. Be sure not to contaminate the glass window of the reader. Otherwise the
scanning performance may be degraded.
2. The screws to secure the reader should not be tightened unless you have
adjusted the reader properly.
Figure 4-19 Structure of reagent bar code module
1. Place a rubber cushion in the groove of the anti-fog device mounting plate.
2. Place the anti-fog glass on the rubber cushion.
3. Use six M2×8 cross pan head screws(torque: 1.5-2.5kgf.cm) to fix the heat
board to the mounting plate with its grooved side upwards.
4. Place a heater in the groove of the heat board.
5. Coat little heat glue to the heater on the downward side of the
overheat-protection switch, and then use a M3×12 socket head screw to press
out the overheat-protection switch.
6. Stick a sponge spacer to the dust shield of the bar code reader.
Precautions:

1. The window on the rubber cushion should be level to that on the mounting plate.
2. The glass must not be broken or contaminated.
3. The cables of heater and overheat-protection switch should be guided properly

for convenient connection.
4. The window on the sponge spacer should be level to that on the dust shield, so
that the light beams from the bar code reader can pass through successfully.
Figure 4-20 Structure of anti-fog and heat module
4.4 Reaction Disk Unit
4.4.1 Introduction
The reaction disk assembly holds reaction cuvettes and rotates clockwise, carrying
the cuvettes to specified positions for sample/reagent dispensing and stirring, and
wash solution dispensing. Reagents and sample react with each other in reaction
cuvette. Also the reaction disk assembly provides a constant-temperature
environment for the reaction.
The figure below shows the positions on the reaction disk. No.4 is for stirring R2,
No.14 is for dispensing sample, No.15 is for dispensing diluted sample, No.44 is for
dispensing R2, No.51 is for dispensing R1, No.64 is for stirring sample, No.65 is for
stirring diluted sample, and No.83-90 is for washing cuvettes.
For instructions of replacing reaction cuvettes, see 8.9.9Replacing Reaction Cuvette.

Figure 4-21 Working positions on reaction disk
Diluted sample mixing position (65#)

Sample mixing position (64#)
Washing position
(83-90#)
Reaction Disk
R1 dispensing
position (51#)
R2 mixing
position
R2 dispensing
position (44#)
Sample dispensing
position(14#)
Diluted sample dispensing
position(15#)

The reaction disk unit consists of the reaction disk assembly, drive part, reaction
compartment assembly, coder sensor assembly and motor assembly. See Figure
4-22.
Figure 4-22 Structure of reaction disk unit

Reaction disk assembly: Used to hold reaction cuvettes, provide a
constant-temperature environment for reaction of reagent and sample in cuvettes,
and assist the photometric system to measure the absorbance change of reaction
liquid.
Drive part: Used to drive the reaction disk assembly to rotate and carry reaction
cuvettes to specified positions for sample/reagent dispensing and stirring, and wash
solution dispensing. During operation, the motor drives the axis to rotate via the
synchronous belt.
Motor assembly: Used to provide force which drives the reaction disk assembly to
rotate via the belt and two belt wheels.
Reaction compartment assembly: Used to provide a constant-temperature

environment for reaction of reagent and sample, and to deflect water.
Coder sensor assembly: Used to find the mechanical zero position and count the
valid edges of the coder.
4.4.3 Replacing Components and Parts

Figure 4-23 shows the reaction disk unit on the analyzer.
Figure 4-23 Reaction disk unit on the analyzer
See Figure 4-22 for the structure of the reaction disk assembly.
4.4.4 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part

1) Install the bearing fixed axis of the reaction disk drive part(without belt) to the
location hole on the base plate. See Figure 4-24. Please note that the adjusting hole
on the fixed axis should face the back of the base plate. If not, use a cross-head
screwdriver to adjust the fixed axis via the adjusting hole.

Figure 4-24 Installing Reaction Disk Drive Part 1
2) Thread four M5×20 screws with spring washer through the bottom of the base
plate to fix the drive part on it. See Figure 4-26.

4.4.5 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly

1. Install four stand bars on the base plate and tighten them with an adjustable
wrench, then sleeve the synchronous belt. See Figure 4-27.
Figure 4-27 Installing Reaction Disk Motor Assembly 1
2. Install the motor on the mounting plate and install the small belt wheel on the motor
axis. See Figure 4-28.

3. Use four M4×12 socket head screws with plain/spring washer to fix the mounting
plate to the stand bars. Please note not to tighten the screws right now and not
reverse the connector of the motor. See Figure 4-29.
4. Install the belt on the big and small belt wheels, adjust the tension of the belt using
the fixture, and then tighten the four M4×12 socket head screws.
4.4.6 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly

After installing the reaction disk drive part, use three M3×8 screws with pain/spring
washer to secure the coder sensor assembly to the base plate. Please note not to
tighten the screws right now until you have aligned the reaction disk properly via the
sensor.

Figure 4-30 Installing Coder Sensor Assembly
4.4.7 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly

See Figure 4-31.
1) Install three stand bars on the base plate.
2) Use three M4×20 cross pan head screws to secure the reaction compartment to
the stand bars, and then tighten the three screws.
Precautions:
1) Before installing the reaction compartment, make sure you have installed the
reaction disk drive part, motor assembly and optical measurement assembly.
2) The three M4×20 cross pan head screws with plain washer should be used to fix
the reaction compartment to the stand bars.
Figure 4-31 Installing Reaction Compartment Assembly

4.4.8 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly
1. Hold the drive disk by its two arc grooves, which should be aligned to the guide pin
on the rotor sleeve, then install the reaction disk assembly to the rotor sleeve.
2. Use three M5×16 socket head screws to fix the reaction disk assembly to the rotor
sleeve. See Figure 4-32.
3. Install the skylight cover to the drive plate with two retaining screws. See Figure
4-33.
Figure 4-32 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly 1
Arc
groove
Guide pin
Figure 4-33 Installing Reaction Disk Assembly 2

4.5 Mixer Unit
4.5.1 Introduction
The mixer unit includes the sample mixer assembly and reagent mixer assembly.
Both mixer assemblies are equipped with a mixer, which is used to stir the liquid in
reaction cuvette.
Additionally, the mixers are also able to limit their mechanical motions or lock
themselves when power failure occurs.
Working positions of the two mixer assemblies: wash well reaction disk.

Due to different functions and movement timing, the two mixer assemblies differ from
each other in the arm structure, spline shaft, sensor stop plate, limit structure, upper
plate of motor, and sensor.
The mixer assembly consists of the drive part and the mixer arm. See Figure 4-34.
The drive part supports the mixer arm and drives the arm to move vertically or
horizontally, so that the mixers move among different positions.
The drive part includes the horizontal movement structure and vertical movement
structure. Both structures have stepper motors, synchronous belt wheel and
synchronous belt. Integrated with a bracket, the two structures finally drive vertically
or horizontally the mixer arm via the spline shaft.
The mixer arm consists of a mixer, motor, enclosure, etc, which are integrated by the
arm base.
The main difference between the two mixer assemblies is the upper plate of motor.
See Figure 4-35.

Figure 4-34 Structure of mixer assembly

Figure 4-35 Difference between two mixer assemblies
(a) (b)
(a) Sample mixer assembly (b) Regent mixer assembly
4.5.3 Installation
Figure 4-36 Installing two mixer assemblies

4.6 Photometric Unit
4.6.1 Introduction
Chemistry analyzer is a typical precision instrument which features in optics,
mechanics, electronics and logarithm. The spectrophotometer is one of the key
components of the instrument and determines directly the precision and accuracy of
measurement by the system.
The system employs the reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings.
The holographic concave flat-field gratings are used for optical dispersion and
imaging. It can not only simplify the optical design to compact the optical structure,
but also eliminate the stray light. A combined light passing through the entrance slit
projects on the PDA(Photodiode Array) via the concave flat-field gratings. One or
multiple light-activated elements on different positions receive the monochromatic
light at certain wavelength. During operation, the photometric system controlled by
the computer receives the electric signals produced by the light-activated elements of
corresponding wavelength and then converts them into absorbance. In case the
spectrum is defined, the absorbance at multiple wavelengths can be calculated
quickly.
Figure 4-37 Block diagram of photometric unit
Measurement range: 0-3A

FWHM(full wave at half maximum): 8nm±2nm
Wavelength accuracy: ±2nm
Stray light: ≤0.8% at 340nm

Linearity range: 0-3.0A
Stability: By measuring the liquid with absorbance of 0.2A for continuous 1 hour,
we conclude that the difference between the maximum and minimum
absorbance is no greater than 0.01.
We employ the concave flat-field gratings for optics and the photodiode array to
receive light signals.
Reversed optics
Applied wavelength: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm,
605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm

The system applies the holographic concave flat-field gratings and PDA(Photodiode
Array) for photometric measurement. See the figure below. The front lens converges
the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the reaction cuvette via the
fiber bundle. The light beam passes through the reaction cuvette and then converges
at the entrance slit via the lens group 2. The gratings divide the light beam from the
entrance slit and then converge them to the slit array. Finally the PDA behind the slit
array converts the light signals into electric signals and then outputs them.
Figure 4-38 Structure of photometric unit
PDA Slit array Filter

Lens Reaction cuvette
Tungsten-halogen
lamp Lens Fiber bundle
Entrance slit Gratings
The photometric unit is divided into two parts:
Light source assembly

Optical measurement assembly

4.6.2.1 Light source assembly
Figure 4-39 Structure of light source assembly
Figure 4-40 Air duct of light source assembly
4.6.2.2 Optical measurement assembly
The optical measurement assembly is composed of the optical assembly and AD

housing. The optical measurement assembly converges the light beam from the fiber
bundle at the reaction cuvette and then projects the light on the concave gratings via
the entrance slit. Diffracted by the gratings, the spectrum from the entrance slit
images on the PDA. The photometric measurement is realized.

Figure 4-41 Optical measurement assembly
4.6.3 Adjustment of Photometer
4.6.3.1 Adjusting Photoelectric Waves and Collecting Position

Connecting an oscillograph:
Photoelectric collecting position can be determined by analog signals and AD start

signals that are collected using an oscillograph. Therefore, the probe of the
oscillograph should be connected to the specified signal test point.
Open the shielding box of AD collection board (See Chapter 6), connect two probes
of the oscillograph to the AD start signal(RC and GND) and analog signal of channel
1(VG1-VG12), then connect the earth terminal to the ground. (Only the earth terminal
of one probe should be connected to the ground.)The channels, wavelength and test
points are listed in the following table.
The voltage at the 12 wavelengths before AD conversion is tested using a multimeter.

The probes of the oscillograph should be connected as follows. TP12(AGND) is the
reference point.
Chan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
nel
Wave 340 380 412 450 505 546 570 605 660 700 740 800
lengt
h
Test VG1 VG2 VG3 VG4 VG5 VG6 VG7 VG8 VG9 VG10 VG11 VG12
Point

Figure 4-42 AD collection board
Setting up the oscillograph:

The two probes of the oscillograph can be any of the 4 channels and now supposed
to be channel 1 and 2, which should be configured to make the oscillograph qualified
for photoelectric test.
The peak value of a normal signal is 5V. Both channel 1 and 2 should be adjusted to
2V, so that the photoelectric wave can be observed easily. Ensure the coupling mode
of the two channels is DC. Set up proper sampling interval to get waves easily. Set
the sampling mode to AUTO. See the figure below:

Figure 4-43 Photoelectric wave 1
Time 500ms (500ms

or 1s for each scale
on X-coordinate)
DC Roll mode
2V for this channel,

2V for each scale on
Y-coordinate
Sampling interval
100KS/s
4.6.3.2 Adjusting Lamp Brightness and Photoelectric Collecting

Position
1. Enter the Reaction Disk Unit screen of the system test and maintenance software
(See Chapter 9), select Reset Reaction Disk, and then turn on the lamp. See the
figure below.
2. Use the multimeter to test the power supply adapter and check if the voltage at J16
is within 12.1-12.2V(lamp brightness is approximately within 235-239). If not, select
the Parameter tab and then select Reaction Disk Unit in the Unit field, adjust the
lamp brightness until satisfied. (The greater the parameter, the higher the voltage)
After adjusting the parameters, turn off the lamp and then turn it on so that you can
get adjusted voltage.

Figure 4-44 Adjusting Light Source Brightness
3. Add 180µl water to cuvettes No.55-60 to ensure flat waves.
4. First test the waves at 340nm, set up the Circles to 1 and (cuvette)Position to 1,
and then select the Rotate and Measure button.
Figure 4-45 Reaction disk rotates and measures
5. When the oscillograph displays the complete waves circularly, press STOP on the
oscillograph. The waves are frozen and stop going.
6. Find the waves for the five cuvettes in which water is dispensed. (In order to find
the waves easily, water should be dispensed to cuvettes No.55-60). Generally, the
five waves of the cuvettes with water are higher and flatter than those of other
cuvettes.
If the waves are flat, the yellow waves refer to AD start signals (In a bundle of
collected signals, the rightmost means 340nm and the leftmost means 800nm), and
the red waves refer to the photoelectric analog signals.

Check if the AD start signal at 340nm is in the middle of the photoelectric analog
signal (See the figure below). If yes, the photoelectric collecting position is correct.
If the AD start signal at 340nm is in the decreasing part of the photoelectric analog
signal instead of its middle (See the figure below), the photoelectric collecting position
is not correct and must be adjusted by moving the coder sensor of the reaction disk
left or right.

After the 340nm channel is adjusted, connect the probe 2 to VG12 of channel 12,
check the waves and collecting position of 800nm in the same way as 340nm. Make
sure that all AD start signals are in the flat part of the photoelectric analog signals.
Check if the waves of all channels are flat according to the step mentioned above. If
not, the pre-amplification board may go wrong and the optical assembly should be
replaced.
Figure 4-48 Abnormal waves
4.6.3.3 Adjusting Signal Gain of Photoelectric Unit

The purpose of adjusting signal gain is to extend the service life of the lamp while
understanding that the lamp alarm is triggered due to weak light.
Precautions for signal gain adjustment:
1. You are not recommended to extend the service of the lamp by adjusting the signal
gain.
2. The signal gain of the photoelectric unit has been configured properly before the
analyzer leaves the factory. When an alarm occurs indicating weak light, replace the
lamp instead of adjusting the signal gain. After replacing the lamp, check the new
lamp by executing Cuvette/Lamp Check on the Daily Maint. page of the operating
software.
3. If the gain for 340nm is 50 and the absorbance of water blank is less than or close
to the alarm limit, replace the new lamp as follows:
NOTE
Before testing the photoelectric gain, make sure that the lamp has been
on for at least 10 minutes; otherwise the lamp is not steady.

a. Select the Photoelectric Unit tab of the Test and Maintenance Software, check
if the AD values for water blank of cuvettes No.55-64 are greater than 28800.
b. If the AD value exceeds the range, select the Parameter tab and then select
Main Unit in the Unit field, select Inquire to view the gain parameters of each
channel (When the gain parameter increases, the corresponding AD value will
decrease), adjust the water blank AD value of each channel within 47000-49000.
4.6.4 Replacing Tungsten-halogen Lamp

The tungsten-halogen lamp must be replaced when its light intensity attenuates to the
specified threshold. Follow this procedure to replace the lamp:
1. Remove the rear cover of the analyzer.
2. Use a cross-head screwdriver to loosen the two screws that fix the air duct in front
of the light source. Remove the air duct in front of the light source.
3. Use a cross-head screwdriver to loosen the two screws that fix the rear plate of
the lamp housing, and then remove the lamp housing by its upper plate, left plate,
right plate and rear plate.
4. Pinch the lamp base with one hand, and press the lever on the left of the base,
finally remove the lamp.

5. Pinch the new lamp by its base and insert the lamp pins into the mounting holes.
Ensure that the larger pin be inserted into the larger hole and the smaller one into
the smaller hole. Wear white cotton gloves while replacing the lamp. Don’t pinch
the bulb of the lamp so that the lamp will not be contaminated or broken.
4.6.5 Replacing Optical Assembly

If the optical assembly can no longer work as promised, perform the following steps
to replace it:
1. Remove the upper and front panels of the analyzer.
2. Remove the reaction disk.
3. Remove the upper plate of the AD housing; unplug the pre-amplification-AD

collection cable from the AD collection board, and unplug the parallel port
connector from the bottom of the AD housing assembly; remove the AD housing
assembly.
4. Remove the cover on the air duct of the light source assembly; use a hex
wrench to loosen the M3 retaining screw that fixes the fiber bundle on the front
plate of lamp housing; then unplug the fiber bundle.
5. Loosen the three screws that fix the heat chamber; raise the heat chamber with
one hand and lift up the optical assembly with the other hand so that the front
lens assembly is disconnected from the heat chamber.

6. Install the new optical assembly following the above steps reversely.
Precautions:
1. Cap the fiber bundle terminal that is removed.
2. The fiber bundle is bound loosely by a clip on the support of the heat chamber.
Hold the fiber bundle carefully so that it will not touch the axis of the reaction disk.
When removing the fiber bundle, remove it from the clip; then thread the fiber bundle
back into the clip during installation.
3. After removing the old optical assembly, place it in the installation package together
with the fiber bundle, and then bring the package back or send it to our company for
servicing.
4.7 Wash Unit
4.7.1 Introduction
In order to use the reaction cuvettes repeatedly, the system is integrated with the
wash unit, which is used to:
Wash reaction cuvettes;

Drain the waste liquid in reaction cuvettes;
To prime and empty the fluidic tubing;
To preheat wash solution and deionized water.
4.7.2 Functions
A reaction cuvette containing analyzed liquid passes successively the washing
positions 1-8. The wash unit includes 8 aspirate probes (Pd1-Pd8) and 8 dispense
probes(Pc1-Pc8), which are respectively located above positions 1-8.During washing
process, the corresponding solenoid valve is turned on before the wash probes lower
down, and then the dispense probes dispense wash solution in corresponding
cuvettes while lowering down. During the dispensing process, the dispense probes
also act as the overflow probes. Then the corresponding solenoid valve is turned on
and the waste liquid is discharged into the high-/low-concentration waste tanks.
The following figure shows the structure of the wash unit and the detailed procedure
for washing cuvettes.

Figure 4-49 Structure and work flow of wash unit
The cuvette washing process is introduced below.
1. When the cuvette containing analyzed liquid reaches position 1, the reaction
liquid is aspirated by Pd1, and then Pc1 dispenses wash solution to the cuvette.
2. In the next period, the cuvette is carried to position 2. Pd2 aspirates the wash
solution, and then Pc2 dispenses wash solution to the cuvette.
3. In the third period, the cuvette is carried to position 3. Pd3 aspirates the wash
solution, and then Pc3 dispenses deionized water to the cuvette.
4. In the fourth period, Pd4 aspirates the deionized water, and then Pc4 dispenses
deionized water in the cuvette.
5. In the fifth and sixth periods, step 4 is repeated. When Pc6 dispenses wash
solution in the sixth period, the reaction disk rotates, carrying the cuvette to the
lamp site for photometric measurement. Whether the cuvette is washed clean is
determined by the measuring result(water blank).
6. In the seventh period, Pd7 aspirates the deionized water. This operation is
repeated in the eighth period. Pd7 and Pd8 are equipped respectively with a
wipe block on their ends. A very small space exists between the inside cuvette
and the wipe block, therefore, the water drop on the cuvette wall can be wiped
so that the cuvette is dried.
7. The solenoid valve is turned on to drain the high-/low-concentration waste liquid.
4.7.3 Structure and Installation

General structure of the wash unit
The wash unit is composed of wash probes, wash probe driver and collecting board.
The wash probes are fixed on the wash probes driver via retaining srews. The
collecting board is fixed on the probe driver via 2 M4X12 socket head screws.
Figure 4-1 General structure of the wash unit

Installation of wash unit driver assembly
Figure 4-2 Installation of wash unit driver assembly

4.8 ISE Unit(optional)
4.8.1 Introduction
The ISE module is optional for fully-automated chemistry analyzers and designed to
measure the concentration of K+, Na+, Cl- and Li+ in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
The volume of the serum or plasma sample is 70µl and that of the diluted urine
sample is 140µl. The dilution ratio of the urine sample is 1:10 (1 part of urine sample
and 9 parts of urine diluent).

The ISE unit consists of the ISE module, pump module and reagent module. See
Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Components of ISE module

Name Description
ISE module The ISE module includes five electrodes (Li+, Na+, K+, Cl- and
Reference). Samples are dispensed via the sample entry port on
top of the ISE module and then analyzed and measured.
Pump The pump module includes three peristaltic pumps, which are
module used to transfer reagents and waste liquid.
Reagent The reagent module includes calibrant A, calibrant B, waste tank
module and a chip that indicates reagent inventory. This module provides
reagents for sample analysis and stores the waste liquid.
The following figures show the structure of ISE unit, ISE module, pump module and
reagent module.
Figure 4-50 Structure of ISE module

Figure 4-51 Structure of pump module
Figure 4-52 Reagent module

5 Hydropneumatic System
5.1 Introduction
1. The fluidic system of system includes the sampling system and washing system.
2. The sampling system is equipped with three probes, two mixers and three syringes.
The sample syringe is 100µl and the two reagent syringes are 500µl.
3. The inside and outside of the three probes and the outside of the two mixers are
washed via pressure driving. The inside of the three probes are cleaned with
deionized water.
4. Wash well: Inner diameter of waste tubing is 0.5”. There are five wash wells and 7
normal waste liquids, which include reagent refrigeration waste, reaction disk
overflow waste, etc.
5. The reaction cuvettes are washed in 8 phases: 1) Phase 1-2: Cuvette is washed with
wash solution; 2) Phase 3-6: Cuvette is washed with deionized water; 3) Phase 7-8:
Cuvette is dried and wiped. During washing process, the wash solution and
deionized water are dispensed into cuvettes by pressure, and the waste liquids are
removed and drained by vacuum.
6. Water supply: An external water supply module or water unit is provided to supply
water. Therefore, requirements of water pressure and flow are imposed on the water
supply device.
7. Waste: Plastic hollow tubing is employed to collect the waste liquid. The waste
tubing should be installed at certain height so that the waste liquid can be drained by
gravity. Waste drainage: Low-concentration waste is drained to the sewer using the
waste pump; while high-concentration waste is drained to an external
high-concentration waste bucket that is equipped with a liquid level sensor.
8. High-concentration waste is produced during Phase 1-3 for cuvette washing.
9. Drive source: The reaction cuvettes are washed automatically by air pump driving.
5 Hydropneumatic System 5-1

10. The reaction cuvettes are washed with wash solution A and B, which are diluted
automatically.
11. The system uses three types of compressed air: 25psig (for draining waste liquid),
10psig (for supplying water and wash solution), and 5psig (for supplying
concentrated wash solution). The waste liquids are aspirated and drained by
vacuum within -50k--86kPa (15-25inHg).
12. Before washing cuvettes, the deionized water and diluted wash solution A/B are
preheated to 30-37℃.
13. A separate solenoid valve is provided to wash the outside and inside of three probes
and the outside of the two mixers.
14. Wash solution diluting is performed using a buffer. When the low-concentration
waste is used out, the liquid level sensor alarms. When the system receives the
alarm signals, it turns on successively the valve for driving concentrated wash
solution, valve for driving concentrated wash solution B and valve for controlling
deionized water. Then the wash solution is diluted according to the dilution ratio that
has been configured.
15. The wash unit is able to divides the wash solution. During washing, the deionized
water is preheated and divided into 4 parts and then dispensed into reaction
cuvettes.
16. The pneumatic module is located on lower right of the analyzer in the form of drawer,
which can be pulled out for 500mm.
5-2 5 Hydropneumatic System

5.2 Function Block Diagram
Figure 5-1 Fluidic system of system
Fluidic structure
1. Sampling system 2. Wash system
Sample Solenoid 2.3 Drainage

R1 Syringe R2 Syringe
syringe valves modules
Waste
Sample prbe R1 probe R2 probe Tubing from
H L
Wash reaction
concentration concentratio Others
wells disk and
waste tank n waste tank
reagent
disk
Sample mixer Reagent mixer
Pressure
Pressure Gravity waste
flow
flow collecting tube
2.1
Vacuum/pneu Gravity
matic module flow
Pressure flow
Pressure Pressure waste

Filter and Pressure
Air pump regulating/red collecting tube
muffler swtich
ucing valves
Solenoid H conc. Water

Vacuum tank External Water
Pressure tank Safety valve valves for air Waste Sewer supply
module unit
tubing bucket device
Solenoid valves for Wash solution

washing probes and preheat
2.2
mixing bars module
Hydromatic
module
Wash solution Cuvette wash Water supply

module assembly module
Concentrated Diluted Auto dilution Solenoid

Wash Inlet Inlet Water
wash wash solenoid valves for Filter
unit pump valves tank
solution solution valves washing

5.3 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System
Figure 5-2 Schematic Diagram of Fluidic System

5.4 Connectors
Table 5-1 Fluidic connectors
No. ID Serial Number Model
1 C1 M6Q-030063--- Connector.straigh through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
2 C2 M6Q-030043--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,PP
6 C6 M6Q-030042--- Connector.Straight,Classic1/8"&1/16"ID,PP
Connector.tubing to tubing Y
M6Q-030024---
8 C8 MODEL3140-06-00
M6Q-030024---
9 C9 MODEL3140-06-00
Connector.tubing to tubing Right angle
M6Q-030059---
10 C10 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
11 C11 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
13 C13 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
14 C14 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
15 C15 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
16 C16 3106-06-00
M6Q-030059---
17 C17 3106-06-00
18 C18 M6Q-030096--- Connector.Y,600Barbs,1/2"ID,PP
19 C19 M6Q-030096--- Connector.Y,600Barbs,1/2"ID,PP
M6Q-030068---
20 C20 Connector3106-04-06
Connector.T MODEL Three
M6Q-030064---
23 C23 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00
M6Q-030024---
24 C25 MODEL3140-06-00
Connector. T MODEL Three

M6Q-030064---
25 C27 way,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

Connector. tubing to tubing Y MODEL
M6Q-030024---
26 C28 3140-06-00

M6Q-030064---
27 C29 way,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

M6Q-030064---
28 C30 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

M6Q-030064---
29 C31 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

M6Q-030064---
30 C32 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

M6Q-030064---
31 C32 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00
M6Q-030024---
32 C33 MODEL3140-06-00
M6Q-030024---
33 C34 MODEL3140-06-00

M6Q-030064---
34 C36 way,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

M6Q-030064---
35 C37 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00

M6Q-030064---
36 C38 way ,Φ6OD,3104-06-00
M6Q-030043--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID,PP
38 C40
39 C41
40 C42
Connector.Elbow,500Barb,1/2"ID,Natural
M6Q-030067---
41 C43 PP
M6Q-030067--- Connector.Elbow,500Barb,1/2"ID,Natural PP
42 C44

Connector.straigh
43 C45
M6Q-030063--- through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
Connector.straigh
M6Q-030063---
44 C46 through,Classic,1/8"ID,PP
5.5 Tubing
Table 5-2 Fluidic tubing
Tubhi
ng
No. Serial number Model length
numb
er
Tubing.Soft precision
M6G-020026--- PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm 2130
1 100 Transparent
2 101 Transparent
3 102 Transparent
4 103 Transparent
5 104 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 210
6 105 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,
3001-10-07069 100
7 106 Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,
3001-10-07069 30
8 107 Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,
3001-10-07069 40
9 108 Tygon

Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,
3001-10-07069 35
10 109 Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HLAAX02002,
3001-10-07069 30
11 110 Tygon
Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 35
12 111 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 40
13 112 AAX02002,Tygon
14 113 Transparent
15 114 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 280
16 115 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 130
17 116 AAC02007,Tygon
18 117 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 60
19 118 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 110
20 119 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 110
21 120 AAC02007,Tygon
22 122 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 150
23 123 AAC02007,Tygon
24 124 Transparent

Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 210
25 125 AAC02007,Tygon
3001-10-07069 35
26 126 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 50
27 127 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 50
28 128 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 690
29 129 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 700
30 130 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 710
31 131 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 720
32 132 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 740
33 133 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 750
34 134 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 370
35 135 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 370
36 136 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 380
37 137 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 380
38 138 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 370
39 139 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 360
40 140 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 360
41 141 AAX02002,Tygon

3001-10-07069 350
42 142 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 360
43 143 AAX02002,Tygon
3001-10-07069 370
44 144 AAX02002,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
3001-10-07069 600
45 145 AAC02007,Tygon
M90-000025--- PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm 120
46 146 Transparent
47 147 Transparent
48 148 Transparent
49 149 Transparent
50 150 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 100
51 151 AAC02007,Tygon
52 152 Transparent
53 153 Transparent
54 154 Transparent
55 155 M6G-020049--- Tubing.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mmX10 110

0M
Tubing.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mmX10
M6G-020049--- 240
56 156 0M
Tubing.PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD,250
0040-10-32301 1050
57 157 FT
58 158 Transparent
59 159 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 80
60 160 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020049--- 150
61 161 0M
M6G-020049--- 1380
62 162 0M
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 80
63 163 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020049--- 110
64 164 0M
M6G-020049--- 1050
65 165 0M
66 166 Transparent
67 167 Transparent
68 168 Transparent
69 169 Transparent

70 170 Transparent
71 171 Transparent
72 172 Transparent
73 173 Transparent
74 174 Transparent
75 175 Transparent
Tubing.PVC KNITTED TUBING

M6G-020028--- 360
76 176 12mmX18mm SubTransparent
Tubing.PVC Knitted tubing

M6G-020028--- 360
77 177 12mmX18mm Subtransparent

M6G-020028--- 650

M6G-020028--- 410

M6G-020028--- 700
M6G-020028 Tubing.PVC Knitted tubing

140
81 181 --- 12mmX18mm Subtransparent

110

260

140

80

190

300

200

185
M6G-020026--
PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm 80
-
90 190 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 230
91 191 AAC02007,Tygon
92 192 Transparent
93 193 Transparent
94 194 Transparent
Tubing.PU tubing 4mmX2.5mm

M6G-020002--- 90
95 195 Transparent PU0425
96 196 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-000025--- 90
97 197 AAC02007,Tygon

Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M6G-020026--- 90
98 198 AAC02007,Tygon
99 199 Transparent
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M6G-020026--- 290
100 200 AAC02007,Tygon
101 201 Transparent
102 202 Transparent
M6G-020026--- Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603 270

103 203 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020026--- 1370
PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm
104 204 Transparent
105 205 Transparent
M6G-020026--- Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603 250

106 206 AAC02007,Tygon
M6G-020026--- 1370
107 207 Transparent
108 208 Transparent
109 209 Transparent

110 210 Transparent
111 211 Transparent
112 212 Transparent
M6G-020022--- Tubing. Soft precision 2080

113 213 PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm green
M90-000025--- Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603 90
114 214 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603
M90-020025--- 90
115 215 AAC02007,Tygon
Transparent
116 216
M90-000025--- Tubing.1/8"X1/4",R-3603 240

117 300 AAC02007,Tygon
Tubing. Soft precision

M6G-020025--- 450
118 301 yellow
Tubing.Soft precision PU tubing

M6G-020025--- 460
119 302 4mmX6mm yellow

M6G-020025--- 1900

M6G-020025--- 220
122 312 M6G-020025--- Tubing.Soft precision PU tubing 380

4mmX6mm yellow

M6G-020025--- 330

M6G-020025--- 180

M6G-020025--- 190

M6G-020025--- 320

M6G-020025--- 320

M6G-020025--- 60

M6G-020025--- 60
M6G-020023--- Tubing. Soft precision 240

130 400 PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm red
M6G-020004--- Tubing.Soft nylon tubing 6mmX4mm 500

131 401 white NB0640

M6G-020023--- 90
132 402 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 90
133 403 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 120
134 404 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 70
135 405 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 1600
136 410 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 90
137 411 4mmX6mm red

4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 280
139 413 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 50
140 414 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 400
141 415 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 120
142 416 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 180
143 417 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 80
144 418 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 90
145 419 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 90
146 420 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 105
147 421 4mmX6mm red

M6G-020023--- 160
148 422 4mmX6mm red
M6G-020024--- Tubing.Soft precision PU tubing 360

149 423 4mmX6mm blue


M6G-020024--- 130

M6G-020024--- 50

M6G-020024--- 370

4mmX6mm blue

M6G-020024--- 110

M6G-020024--- 250

157 431 4mmX6mm green


M6G-020022--- 50

M6G-020022--- 290

M6G-020022--- 250
W01 M6G-020002--- Tubing.PU tubing 4mmX2.5mm 150

162 Transparent PU0425
W02 M6G-020026--- 245
163 Transparent
164 W03 M6G-020026--- 1390
Transparent
165 W04 M6G-020028--- Tubing.PVC KNITTED TUBING 360

12mmX18mm SubTransparent
166 W05 M6G-020028--- Tubing.PVC KNITTED TUBING 360

167 W06 M6G-020028--- Tubing.PVC Knitted tubing 650

12mmX18mm Subtransparent

168 W07 M6G-020028--- 410

169 W08 M6G-020028--- 200

170 W09 M6G-020028--- 350

171 W10 M6G-020028--- 200

172 W11 M6G-020028--- 160

173 W12 M6G-020028--- 300
174 W13 M6G-020026--- PU(polyether)tubing 4mmX6mm 1300
Transparent
Transparent

176 W15 M6G-020028--- 50

177 W16 M6G-020028--- 80

178 W17 M6G-020028--- 260

179 W18 M6G-020028--- 460

180 W19 M6G-020022--- 1930
4mmX6mm green
Transparent

Table 5-3 Auto wash tubing label
No. Tubing
laberl
number in
Schematic Serial number Model length
diagram
of fluidic
system
1 129 3001-10-070 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-H

690
69 L AAX02002,Tygon
2 130 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 700
AAX02002,Tygon
3 131 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 710
AAX02002,Tygon
4 132 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 720
AAX02002,Tygon
5 133 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 740
AAX02002,Tygon
6 134 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 750
AAX02002,Tygon
7 135 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 370
AAX02002,Tygon
8 136 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 370
AAX02002,Tygon
9 137 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 380
AAX02002,Tygon
10 138 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 380
AAX02002,Tygon
11 139 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 370
AAX02002,Tygon
12 140 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 360
AAX02002,Tygon
13 141 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 360
AAX02002,Tygon
14 142 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 350
AAX02002,Tygon
15 143 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 360
AAX02002,Tygon
16 144 Tubing.1/16"X1/8",S-50-HL
3001-10-07069 370
AAX02002,Tygon

5.6 Solenoid Valves
Table 5-4 Solenoid valves
Qty.
No. Position Function Subsystem Medium of Model
pins
Deionized
SV01 ML Water supply Auto wash 2NC AB21-02-2-A-DC12V
water
Sampling Deionized
SV02 FL1 R1interior 2NC LFVX0512100BA
system water
Sampling Deionized
SV03 FL2 R2 interior 2NC LFVX0512100BA
system water
Sampling Deionized
SV04 FR S interior 2NC LFVX0512100BA
system water
Wash
SV06 RB1 1 phase wash Auto wash 2NC burkert 6606A
solution
Wash
solution
SV08 BL1 H conc. Waste in Auto wash Waste 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
SV09 L06 L conc. Waste in Auto wash Waste 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
Deionized
SV10 RB3 Auto wash 2NC burkert 6606A
3 phase wash water
H conc. Waste
SV11 BL2 Auto wash Waste 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
out
L conc. Waste
SV12 L05 Auto wash Waste 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
out
Deionized
SV13 RB4 Auto wash 2NC burkert 6606A
4 phase wash water
Auto
SV14 L08 Vacuum/10psi air 3 burkert 6128
dilution
SV15 L09 Vacuum /25psi Auto wash air 3 burkert 6128
Auto dilution
concentrated Auto Wash
SV16 L04 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
Wash solution dilution solution
control
concentrated Auto Wash
SV17 L03 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
Wash solution in dilution solution
Auto
Auto Deionized
SV18 R02 dilutionDeionized 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
dilution water
water control
Primary vacuum
Deionized
SV19 R09 container Auto wash 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
water
drainage

Deionized
water
Deionized
water
Sampling Deionized
SV22 R03 R1exterior 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
system water
Sampling Deionized
SV23 R04 R2exterior 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
system water
Sampling Deionized
SV24 R05 S mix 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
system water
Sampling Deionized
SV25 R06 R mix 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
system water
Sampling Deionized
SV26 R07 S exterior 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
system water
Primary pressure
container Condensed
SV27 R08 Auto wash 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
Condensed water
water out
8 phaseWaste
SV28 L07 Auto wash Waste 2NC WTA-2K-N4G-12
out
Primary vacuum
SV32(WASTE
L10 container Auto wash Waste / PML5161-NF30
PUMP)
drainage
5.7 Layout of Hydropneumatic Drawer

Figure 5-3 Layout of valves, tanks and 11-way connector

25PSI 10PSI
Pressure sensing board
Vac 5PSI
Out
Out
H
sen
Fluid line Air line Air line OUT sen IN Fluid line
sor
sor
L
Low conc. sen
sor
Waste Diluted wash
container solution
Out
container
sen
sor
sen Water Pressure

Fluid line Air line Water in OUT out IN
sor detection
Air
in
H conc. Waste
Front
container Primary
vacuum
Right Left
container
Back
L
sen
sor
H
Fluid line IN sen OUT Air line Air in OUT IN Air out
sor
Wat Wat
er er
out out
Concentrated Primary
wash solution pressure
container container
H
sen
sor
Wa
Air line OUT ter IN Fluid line
out
L
Concentrated wash sen
solution reagent box sor
Water tank

Figure 5-4 Hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 5-5 Tanks in the hydropneumatic drawer
Concentrated
wash solution
container

Figure 5-6 Right view of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 5-7 Left view of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 5-8Front view of Hydropneumatic drawer

Table 5-5 Pressure in standby status
Pressure in
standby 25psi 10psi 5psi VACUUM
status
Visual 0.14 ～ 0.06 ～ 0.08

0.03～0.05 MPa -60～-95KPa
inspection 0.21MPa MPa
Inspection -11.5 ± 2.5

25±5 PSIG 10±1 PSIG 5±1 PSIG
by software PSIG
5.8 Structure of Air Pump Assembly

1. Schematic diagram of air pump assembly
Figure 5-9 Schematic diagram of air pump
2. Internal structure of air pump assembly

Figure 5-10 Air pump module
Figure 5-11 Air pump assembly 1
Muffler holder
Vacuum Filter.MEC2x6DF
Muffler.Fitersil
encer,F02,BS
PT1/4"
Pressure
3. Connection of air pump assembly

Figure 5-12 Air pump assembly 2
Pressure Pump connection

protection switch board

5.9 Water Supply Module(optional)
The water supply module pressurizes the water source and enables the deionized
water to enter into the analyzer easily.
Figure 5-13 Schematic diagram of water supply module
As shown in the figure above, the water supply module consists of five components:
1. power supply; 2. diaphragm pump; 3. pressure switch; 4. inlet valve(inside
analyzer); 5. water tank inside of analyzer.
The internal water tank pressurizes water and supplies it to the wash unit of the
analyzer. Moreover, the water tank possesses liquid level detection device to detect
the water in it. When the water in the water tank is run out, the detection device
sends a signal to turn on the inlet valve 4, and water is supplied. When the water
tank is refilled full, the detection device sends a signal to turn off the inlet valve, and
water supplying is stopped.
The pressure switch 3 is controlled by the pressure that it detects, which can be
configured as needed. Suppose the ON pressure is P1 and OFF pressure is
P2(P1<P2).When the pressure of the tubing that is connected to the pressure
switch is greater than or equal to P2, the pressure switch is OFF; otherwise the
pressure switch is ON. If the pressure is within P1 and P2, the pressure switch
keeps unchanged. Suppose P1<P<P2, when the pressure is equal to P2, the
pressure switch is OFF. If the pressure decreases from P2 to P, the pressure switch
keeps OFF until to P1. Similarly, if the pressure increases from P1 to P, the pressure
switch keeps ON until to P2.
The power supply 1, diaphragm pump 2 and pressure switch 3 are connected in
series and constitute a closed circuit. The diaphragm pump 2 is powered by power
supply 1 and controlled by the pressure switch 3.When the pressure switch 3 is ON,
the circuit is connected and the diaphragm pump 2 is started; otherwise, the circuit
is disconnected and the diaphragm pump 2 is stopped.

Figure 5-14 Connecting water supply module
See the figure above. The external water tank contains purified deionized water,
which is passed via inlet tubing to J1 connector of the water supply module and then
to the analyzer via J11 after being pressurized.
The drainage module pressurizes and discharges the waste liquid from the
analyzer.
Figure 5-15 Skematic diagram of drainage module
The liquid floater sensor inside the waste buffer, upon the amount of waste in the
buffer, sends control signals to the PCB, which then turns on or off the waste pump
accordingly.

Figure 5-16 Connecting drainage module
Normal- High-
pressure pressure Low-
low-conc. low-conc. conc.wa
waste waste ste
(<5m) (<5m) (<10m)
93 94 98
LOW CONC LOW CONC

OUTLET
WASTE1 WASTE2
Drainage module
5.10 Key Components

1. Safety valve
Figure 5-17 Safety valve to prevent overflow
Location: Air pump assembly
Function: Prevent pressure from going up. Overflow will be stopped in case of great
pressure.

2. Pressure regulating valve
Figure 5-18 Pressure regulating valve
Location: Hydropneumatic drawer assembly.
Function: Adjust pressure to specified range. Switch between 5psi and 10psi.

3. Solenoid valve
Figure 5-19 Solenoid valve
Location: Hydropneumatic drawer assembly, etc
Function: Turn on/off all fluidic or air tubing connected to the valve according to
received electric signals.
4. Check valve
Figure 5-20 Check valves
Location: All fluidic or air tubing.
Function: Enable the flow unidirectionally and prevent the liquid or air in the tubing
from flowing back.
NOTE
Do not confuse the check valve with a filter.

Figure 5-21 Filter
5. Pressure switch
Figure 5-22 Pressure switch
Location: Air pump assembly and water supply pressure module
Function: Adjust the pressure range for output.
6. Liquid level floater switch
Figure 5-23 Liquid level floater sensor
Location: Containers that need liquid level detection.

Function: A spring switch is set in the closed plastic tube, and an O-ring magnet
inside the floater. When the floater moves up and down, the magnet inside it will
magnetize and turn on/off the spring switch, thus detecting the liquid level.
7. Oil separator
Figure 5-24 Oil separator
Location: Hydropneumatic drawer assembly.
Function: Remove the water or oil mist in pressure or vacuum air.

6 Hardware
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the function of circuit boards in the system.
6.2 Safety Precautions

Don’t touch the circuit boards by hand or others, when the analyzer is running.
If you need to detach the circuit boards, you must first cut off the power of the
analyzer. Please wear gloves to protect the circuit boards from ESD (electrostatic
discharge) or release the charge first before detaching the circuit boards.
6.3 Circuit boards

The following table lists the number and the function description of the circuit boards.
Table 6-1 Circuit boards of system

PCBA(PCB) Function Number
in
Figure
6-1
Main board As the main control part of the #2
system, the main board
BA40-30-61356
communicates with PC through serial
(BA40-20-61355) port RS232 and transmits data and
commands; also it transmits data and
commands to other sub-units(ISE,
etc) through extended serial ports;
This unit can control the AD
conversion board to adjust the
numerical control resistor and collect
the photoelectric data.
The main board provides a
BDM(Background Debug Model)
6 Hardware 6-1
interface for debugging software, and
a serial port to update its application
software.
Communication board The communication board connects #11
the main board to the PC directly. It
BA40-30-61377
provides special interfaces for
(BA40-20-61376) connection with the main board and
with the computer. The first type
includes the serial port, network
interface, USB port; and the latter
type includes the standard DB9 serial
port, RJ45 network interface and the
standard USB port.
Note: Only the serial ports are now
occupied on the system, and others
are reserved.
Reaction disk temperature This board collects the temperature #10
control board sensor signals from the reaction disk
and converts them into digital
BA40-30-61375
signals. This board provides an
(BA40-20-61374) SPI(Serial Port Interface) and a
power supply interface for connecting
to the three-disk drive board via a slip
ring.
Note: The same PCB is applied for
collecting reaction disk temperature
and preheat temperature. However,
the two temperature collecting
boards differ from each other in the
BOM.
Wash solution preheat This board processes, collects and
temperature control board converts into digital signals the
temperature sensor signals of the
BA40-30-73102
three wash solution flows. This board
(BA40-20-61374) provides an SPI(Serial Port Interface)
and a power supply interface for
connecting to the three-disk drive
board.
Note: The same PCB is applied for
collecting reaction disk temperature
and preheat temperature. However,
the two temperature collecting
boards differ from each other in the
BOM.
Pump and valve drive board This unit receives signal from the #6
three-disk drive board and the
BA40-30-61373
three-probes drive board and then
(BA40-20-61372) makes the pumps and valves act;
There are 5 level detection senses
connecting the three-disk drive board
through this board.
Reagent refrigeration board This unit is used to cool the reagents, #12
indicate the temperature and drive
BA40-30-61371
the fan and defog circuit.
(BA40-20-61370)
6-2 6 Hardware
Level detection board This unit can test the reagent’s or the #9
sample’s level and detects
051-000360-00
obstructions occurring to the sample
（050-000283-00） probe and reagent probes.
400ul reagent probe level This unit can test the reagent’s level #9
detection board for 400 ul reagent probe and
detects obstructions occurring 400
051-000361-00
ulreagent probes.
（050-000283-00）
Clot detection board By observing the pressure change #5
inside the sample probe, this board
051-000218-00
detects the clots in the sample probe.
(050-000223-00)
AD conversion board This unit can modify the analog #7
signals from the pre-amp board and
BA40-30-61365
convert the analog signals into digital
(BA40-20-6136) signals. Also this board provides an
SPI(Serial Port Interface) for
connecting to the main board.
Preamplification board This unit can converse the light #8
signals into electrical analog signals
BA40-30-61363
by the photoelectric diode.
(BA40-20-61362)
Three-probe drive board This unit can control and drive the #4
first reagent probe, the second
BA40-30-61361
reagent probe, the sample mixer and
(BA40-20-61360) the reagent mixer to act.
Pressure detection board This board detects the pressure of
the air tubing that is connected to the
BA40-30-61447
vacuum compression pump, and
(BA40-20-61446) provides a serial port for
communicating and transferring
pressure data.
AC pump connection board This board acts as an adapter to
connect the AC pump and its fan to
BA40-30-61781
the power supply. The AC pump is
(BA40-20-61780) powered by alternating current and
connected to the power supply
assembly; and the fan is powered by
direct current and connected to the
reagent refrigeration board.
Drainage module control board This board detects the signals
indicating that the low-concentration
BA40-30-61498
waste tank is full, and then turns on
(BA40-20-61497) the waste pump to discharge the
waste, thus avoiding waste overflow.
Also this board sends the waste full
signals to the computer, which then
gives alarms to remind the user to
empty the low-concentration waste
time immediately.
Inlet pump power supply board This board turns on/off the inlet pump
power according to the pressure
BA40-30-72955
signals of the inlet tubing, so as to
(BA40-20-72954) ensure safe pressure of the inlet
6 Hardware 6-3
tubing.
Three-disk drive board This unit can control and drive the #1
three disks, wash unit, temperature
BA40-30-61359
control unit and other related moving
(BA40-20-61358) parts.
Power board This unit provides the power for the #3
whole machine.
12V board:
BA40-30-61623
(BA40-20-61622)
24V board:
BA40-30-61625
(BA40-20-61624)
Connection board:
BA40-30-61627
(BA40-20-61626)
6.4 Layout of the boards

Figure 6-1 shows the circuit boards on the analyzer.
Figure 6-1 Layout of the circuit boards
6-4 6 Hardware
6.5 Detaching and Assembling Circuit Boards
You must pull out all plugs (refer to 6.8Connection Diagram) first when you detach
the boards and then you get out the fixing screws on the boards.
6.6 Function of board

6.6.1 Control Framework
The system consists of the following three units: the analyzing unit(main unit),
operation unit(PC) and output unit(printer).
The analyzing unit(main unit) consists of the following units: the temperature control
system, the reaction system(include ISE), the photoelectric test system, the sample
and reagent delivery system, the mixing system and the auto clean unit etc.
Figure 6-2 shows the control framework of the system.
communicating with the PC through the RS232 to send commands , reply data
and test results.
controlling the data acquired process of optical system .
controlling the moving units’ action and collecting the status signal.
controlling the temperature adjustment system and collecting temperature status
signal.
Figure 6-2 Control framework of system
6.6.2 Main Board

Function of the main board:
transmitting the data and commands with PC through RS232.

communicating with the sub-units(include ISE), transmitting the data and
commands through the extended RS232.
6 Hardware 6-5
adjusting the numeric adjustable resistor on the AD conversion board and
collecting the photoelectric data.
providing a BDM interface to debug software and update application software.
providing USB interface, spare.
Figure 6-3 shows the function framework of the main control board.
Figure 6-3 Function of the main control board
BDM
Power supply PC
debug
BDM UART
I2C
RTC
DEVICE
USB
SPI
EEPROM
CPU FEC
PHY
SDRAMC
SDRAM
USB
PCI
USB Device
Host
Flex Bus
FLASH
AD conversion board
Three-disk drive board

FPGA
Three-probe drive board
Main board
ISE module
LED FUNCTION
D3 3.3V digital power indicator（secondary power）
D4 +12V analog power indicator
D16 5V digital power indicator
D17 -12V analog power indicator
6.6.3 Three-disk Drive Board

This circuit board can receive the commands from the main board, and decode the
orders to drive the moving parts of the three disks and the auto wash unit; it also
control the heater according the signal from the temperature senses. Main function
6-6 6 Hardware
All CPU on this board receive the orders from the main board through the RS232,
and decode it to act.
The CPU on board output signals to control the moving parts related with the
three disks.
This unit can receive the signals from the moving parts’ senses, signal protected
from collision of the auto clean unit and other status signals.
This unit can control the heater of the reaction disk (solid heater directly), the
pre-warm wash water and it can test the temperature of this two parts and the
environment temperature too.
This unit can receive signals from the liquid level senses and response according
the signals.
Figure 6-4 shows the function framework of the three-disk drive board.
Figure 6-4 Three-disk-drive board
：
Note：
When replacing the three-disk drive board of G version or above, please take care
to differentiate the new and old machine. For machines which have liquid change
conducted, the board can be replaced directly. Otherwise, the jumper cap on the J15
terminal 4 and terminal 3 should be removed first.
LED FUNCTION
6 Hardware 6-7
D22 +24V driver power indicator
D30 5V analog power indicator
D31 wash water heater 1 working indicator. ON: the heater is on.
D34 Reaction disk heater 2 working indicator. ON: the heater is on.
D38 High concentration waste bucket status. ON: the bucket is full.
D39 Waste buffer container status. ON: the container is full.
D40 Inside washing wash solution container status. OFF: the wash
solution botter is empty.
6.6.4 Three-probe Drive Board

This unit can control the stepper motors, the DC motors and the valves related with
the probes and the mixers and response according with the signals from the senses.
This unit can receive the orders from the main board through the RS232 and
transmit the test data to the main board.
This unit can control and drive the moving parts of the R1 probe, R2 probe, the
sample probe, the sample mixer, the reagent mixer, the valves, the syringes, etc.
This unit can receive the position signals from the moving parts’ senses. and the
signal for protecting probes from collision in horizontal orientation
This unit can test the liquid level according the signal from the level detection
board and receive the signals for protecting the probes from collision too .
This unit can test the clot signal of the sample probe through the interface with
the clot detection board and read the pressure value too.
Figure 6-5 shows the function framework of the three-probe drive board.
6-8 6 Hardware
Figure 6-5 Three-probe drive board
LED FUNCTION
D5 24V driver power indicator
6.6.5 Pre-amp Board

The Pre-amp circuit board can converse the light signals into electrical analog signals
by the photoelectric diode array. There are 12 elements on the photoelectric diode
array who can converse the light signal into the current signal in difference
wavelengths and the Pre-amplifier turns the current signal to the voltage signal and
transmit this signal to the AD conversion board.
6.6.6 AD Conversion Board

This unit can modify the analog signals from the pre-amp board and convert the
analog signals into digital signals. The 12 elements on the photoelectric diode array
converse the monochromatic light signal into the voltage signal in the difference
wavelengths and the AD conversion board filters the signal and amplifies it
anti-polarity, then this signal arrives the AD input after it passes the selectable switch;
6 Hardware 6-9
then the AD samples the 12 signals in turn controlled by the signal from the main
control board and the AD result value are sent to the main control board to deal with
further. The AD conversion board also provides power to the Pre-amp board.
Figure 6-6 shows the function framework of the AD conversion board.
Figure 6-6 AD conversion board
AD conversion board
12 photoelectric Gain Multi- Photoelectric
Pre-amp. signals AD data
regulating channel Main board
board Power collection Control
circuit selection signal
LED FUCNTION
6.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board

This board is independent compared with other circuit boards; the unit can control the
cooler chip on or off and then make the reagents cool; it can adjust the temperature in
the reagent carousel ; this unit can also drive the fan of the whole system and reflect
the fan’s signal to the three disks control-driver board; the detail is:
controlling the refrigeration
controlling the indicating LED of the refrigeration
controlling the fans and defogging the code scan’s windows
Figure 6-7 shows the function framework of the reagent refrigeration board.
Figure 6-7 Reagent refrigeration board
6-10 6 Hardware
LED FUNCTION
D2 12V fan power indicator
D3 12V power indicator
D4 5V power indicator (secondary power)
D5 24V fan power indicator
D6 Temperature indicator, red. ON: higher than the upper

limit of refrigeration temperature range.
D7 Temperature indicator. ON: within the normal range of

refrigeration temperature.
D8 Temperature indicator, orange. ON: lower than the

upper limit of refrigeration temperature range.
D9 Regrigeration plate 2 working indicator. ON:

refrigeration plate is working.
D11 Regrigeration plate 1 working indicator. ON:

refrigeration plate is working.
6.6.8 Level Detection Board

There are three circuit boards for detecting the liquid level, two boards for reagent
level detection and one board for sample level detection; the function detail is:
The three level detection boards have the same construction and interface and
detect the reagent level and sample level individually with the high reliability,
especially the sample level detection.
The circuit boards generate the level detection signal when the probes touch the
liquid level; the depth that the probes dip into the liquid is not more than 2mm.
This unit can protect the probe from collision vertical ; it generates signal which is
sent to the three probes control-driver board.
Figure 6-8 shows the function framework of the level detection board.
Figure 6-8 Level detection board function
LED FUNCTION
6 Hardware 6-11
D2 Auto adjustment indicator, orange. ON: auto
adjustment is successful ( level detection is enabled)
D5 Level indicator. ON: level is detected.
D6 Vertical collision indicator. ON: vertical collision

occurs.
6.6.9 Clot Detection Board

The clot detection board of the system main function:
This circuit board can draw a conclusion of ‘possible’ clot by judgment the change of
the pressure value when the sample probe aspirates the sample and send this signal
to the three probes control-driver board.
This circuit board can draw a conclusion of ‘convinced’ clot by judgment the change
of the pressure value when the sample probe aspirates the sample and send this
signal to the three probes control-driver board.
This circuit board can draw a conclusion of ‘air’ aspiration by judgment the change of
the pressure value when the sample probe aspirates the sample and send this signal
to the three probes control-driver board.
This circuit board can judge the clot cleared accord the change of the pressure value
when the probe is washed inside and outside in the wash pot and send the indicated
signal to the three control-driver board.
Figure 6-9 shows the function framework of the clot detection board.
Figure 6-9 Clot detection board
LED FUNCTION
D3 Clot indicator, red. ON: clot is detected.
D4 Empty sucking indicator. ON: empty sucking is detected.
D5 Possible clot indicator. ON: possible clot is detected.
D6 12V analog power indicator
6-12 6 Hardware
6.6.10 Pump/Valve Drive Board
This circuit board receives signals from the three disks control-driver board and the
three probes control-driver board and then generates the pumps and valves control
signals; it can drive the out water pump(spare),36 valves(16 spare) ; there are 5 level
detection senses connecting the three disks control-driver board through this board.
Figure 6-10 shows the function framework of the pump and valve driver board.
Figure 6-10 Pump/valve drive board
LED FUNCTION
D1 three-disk dirver board 5V power indicator (used to drive

photo-coupler)
D28 three-probe dirver board 5V power indicator (used to drive

photo-coupler)
6.6.11 Reaction Disk Temperature Control Board

The reaction disk temperature control board collects signals from the reaction disk
temperature sensor and then converts them into digital signals. This board provides
an SPI interface and a heater power interface, and is connected to the three-disk
driver board via a slip ring.
LED FUNCTION
6 Hardware 6-13
NOTE
The same PCB is applied for the reaction disk temperature control
board and the preheat temperature control board. However, the two
temperature control boards differ from each other in the BOM.
6.6.12 Preheat Temperature Control Board

The preheat temperature control board processes and collects the signals from the
three wash solution temperature sensors, and them converts them into digital signals.
This board provides an SPI interface and a heater power interface, and is connected
to the three-disk drive board via a slip ring.
LED FUNCTION
6.6.13 Communication Board

The communication board connects directly the main control unit and the PC .It
connects the main board in the system and provides interface to connect PC outside;
the detail is:
providing the interfaces connecting the main control board: serial port, Ethernet
port, USB port
providing the port connecting the PC outside: DB9 serial port, RJ45 WEB port,
standard USB port
This circuit board is the relay station between the main control board and the PC
outside and it can protect and isolate the communication signal too.
6.7 Power Supply Module

The power supply module consists of three circuit boards: 24V board, 12V board and
power connection board.
The 24V board transforms the AC power to the A24V, B24V and A12V(the lamp
source).
The 12V board transforms the AC power to the other 12V(B12V and C12V) and 5V as
the system needs.
The power connection board has the function of relaying the AC power, controlling
the vacuum pump power, transforming to -12V, controlling the C12V and output of the
other voltages.
The power supply module provides all power through the interfaces on the power
connection board, and the 24V board, the 12V board and the connection board use
the plug board to board to connect.
The whole power system is a integrity module. It can be shielded and isolated from
the heat efficiency.
The power supply module can be cooled by the fans.
6-14 6 Hardware
6.7.1 Features of Power Supply Module
6.7.1.1 Input
Input AC voltage: 90-264VAC
Frequency: 50/60±3Hz
Input power: 2KVA
Max instantaneous current: <40A
6.7.1.2 AC Output Voltage: AC1

AC1 voltage: 90-264VAC
AC1 frequency: 50/60±3Hz
AC1 output power: 300VA
Control request: AC1 is controlled by the TTL signal from the system; AC1 is
available when the control signal is high; there is no output when the control
signal is low; the control signal of TTL can provide the current more than 10mA.
6.7.1.3 AC Output Voltage: AC2

AC2 voltage: 90-264VAC
AC2 frequency: 50/60±3Hz
AC2 output power: 50W
Control request: AC2 is controlled by the TTL signal from the system; AC2 is
available when the control signal is high; there is no output when the control
signal is low; the control signal of TTL can provide the current more than 10mA.
6.7.1.4 DC Output: 5V – for Circuit Board

Output current:8A
Output voltage: 4.85-5.25V
Output ripple noise: 100mVp-p
6.7.1.5 DC Output: A12V – for Lamp

Output voltage：5-12.5V
Control request: A12V is controlled by an analog signal from the system; A12V is
available when the control signal is more than 1.5V; A12V changes linearly from
5V-12.5V when the control signal changes linearly from 2-4VThe analog control
signal can provide current more than 5mA.A12V is not available when there is no
control signal; the control signal must rise gradually when the power is on to
make sure minimum the surf current.
6.7.1.6 DC Output: B12V – for Refrigeration and Fans

Output current: 8A
Output ripple noise: <=140mVp-p
6 Hardware 6-15
6.7.1.7 DC Output: C12V – for Pump /Valve Board
Output current: 7A
6.7.1.8 DC Output: -12V - for AD Conversion

Output current: 0.8A
Output voltage: -11.4- -12.6V
6.7.1.9 DC Output: A24V – for ISE Unit, Fans

Output current: 2.5A
Output voltage: 23.5-26V
6.7.1.10 DC Output: B24V – for Heater, Motor, Pump, Wash

Solution Preheat
Output current:21A
Output voltage: 23.5-26V
6.7.2 Block Diagram

Figure 6-11 shows the framework of the power module.
6-16 6 Hardware
Figure 6-11 Framework of power supply module
6 Hardware 6-17
6.8 Connection Diagram
Figure 6-12 Connection diagram 1
6 Hardware 6-19
6-20 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D Pre-am p board D
BA40-30-61363
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
J2 J3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 J1 1 2 3
BA40-20-61486
Orange
Orange
Yellow
Yellow
Green
AGND White
BA40-20-61484
BA40-20-61485
SGND Black
Green
White
Gray
Black
2 AGND Black
Blue
Gray
Blue
Blue
Red
Red
Red
AGND
SGND
1 VDD
3 VSS
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
SIG1
SIG2
SIG3
SIG4
SIG5
SIG6
C C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 J1 1 2 3
J2 J3
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
AD conversion board
BA40-30-61365
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 B
B
10 DCP_CLK
18 AD_BUSY
11 DCP_DIN
19 AD_CLK
9 DCP_EN
6 AD_DIN
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
21 CH_A3
4 15GND
17 15GND
25 GND
13 GND
1 +15V
14 +15V
5 GND
16 VCC
8 GND
3 VCC
12 NC
15 -15V
2 -15V
7 NC
BA30-20-06552
J13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A
M ain board BA40-30-61356 MINDRAY A
Pre-amp board 、 AD conversion
TITLE :
board connecting diagram
File ： Bytes ：
DWG NO . A-BA40-30- REV 1.0
Date ： Time ：
Software & Rev : Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 3 OF 16 SIZE A 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-21
6-22 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
M ain board
BA40-30-61356
J3
J8
2 4 6 8 10
1 3 5 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 PC_RESET
Red
6 PWFBOUT
2 PC_RXD
3 PC_TXD
BA40-20-61590
BA40-20-61589
5 GND
5 GND
C C
3 RX+
10 NC
2 TX-
1 TX+
1 NC
4 NC
6 NC
8 NC
9 NC
4 RX-
J3 J6
2 4 6 8 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 3 5 7 9
Comm unication board Ports: J1 ~ J6

BA40-30-61377 Ports spare : J1, J4
J2 J5
1 2 3 4 5 2 4 6 8
6 7 8 9 1 3 5 7
B B
7 PC_RESET
2 PC_RXD
3 PC_TXD
BA33-20-35270
5 GND
3 RX+
6 RX-
2 TX-
1 TX+
1 NC
4 NC
6 NC
8 NC
9 NC
7 NC
8 NC
4 NC
5 NC
RS232 W eb port
PC
A
MINDRAY
Com m unication board connecting
A
TITLE : diagram
File ： Bytes ：
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sample level First reagent level Second reagent level

detection board detection board detection board
BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369
J2 J2 J2
2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
black
black
red
red
3
BA40-21-61727
BA40-21-61728
BA40-20-61906
BA40-20-61907
3
2 RAM_V_PHO 2
2 RAM_V_PHO 2
2 RAM_V_PHO 2
black 1
black 1
black 1
red 4
red 4
BA40-21-61776
red 4
D
1 LEVEL green
1 LEVEL green
green
D
blue
blue
blue
1 LEVEL
2 GND
2 +12V
2 +12V
2 GND
1 +6V
2 +12V
1 +6V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
J29 1 2 J30 1 2 J21 1 2 J20 1 2 J22 1 2 J19 1 2 J23 1 2 J18 1 2
BA40-21-61706
6brown B- 4brown
1
6
B+ 3orange
First reagent arm 4 4orange
J4
up/down m otor
3 3yellow A- 2yellow
3
BA40-10-
1 1red A+ 1red
4
BA40-21-61778
BA40-21-61707
1
6 6brown B- 4brown 1 V PP Red
J24 J3
First reagent arm 4 4orange B+ 3orange 2 VEE
2
rotation m otor
J5
1 2 3 CLOG_YES 1 2
3
BA40-10- 3 3yellow A- 2yellow
4 CLOG_M AY
C 1 1red A+ 1red ： J1 ~ J32
Ports： 3 4 3 4 C
4
5 NO_SAM
5 6 5 6
FPGA AS: J1 6 INT_CON
BA40-2 1-61710
7 8 7 8
1
6 6brown B- 4brown 7 INT_EN
FPGA JTAG : J2 9 10 8 G ND 9 10
2
First reagent syringe 4 4orange B+ 3orange
J6
motor 9 RES_CLG_I
BA40-30-61367
Three- probes drive board
Clot detection
3
Port spare: J25 10 RES_CLG_O
BA40-30-61361
board
4
1 1red A+ 1red
BA 40-21-61711 1
6 6brown B- 4brown 1 V PP Red
J17 J2
2
3orange 2 VEE
Second reagent arm 4 4orange B+
J7
up/down motor 3 RXD_CLG 1 2
3
1 2
4 TXD_CLG
3 4 3 4
4
1 1red A+ 1red 5 PSEN_CLG

5 6 5 6
6 RST_CLG
7 8
1
7 8 7 G ND
BA4 0-21-61713
6 6brown B- 4brown 8 GND
2
4 4orange B+ 3orange
J8
Second reagent arm

3
rotation motor BA40-21-61779 B

B 3 3yellow A- 2yellow
BA40-10-
4
1 1red A+ 1red
J9
4 3 2 1
J11 J12 J13 J14 J15 J16
J10 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
3orange
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
4brown
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
2yellow
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
BA40-21-61718
BA40-21-61721
BA40-21-61724
BA40-21-61720
BA40-21-61723
BA40-21-61716
BA40-21-61715
BA40-21-61726
A+
A+
B+
B+
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
6 6brown B-
6brown B-
A+
A+
A+
A+
A+
A+
B+
4 4orange B+
4 4orange B+
B+
B+
B+
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
3 3yellow A-
6brown B-
6brown B-
6 6brown B-
6 6brown B-
6brown B-
6 6brown B-
4 4orange
4 4orange
4 4orange
4 4orange
4 4orange
4 4orange
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
1 1red
MINDRAY
6
6
6
6
A A
Three- probe drive board
Second reagent Sample probe arm Sample probe arm Sample syringe m otor Reagent mixer arm Reagent mixer arm Sample m ixer arm Sam ple mixer arm TITLE :
BA 40-10-
connecting diagram (1)
File ： Bytes ： syringe m otor up/down motor rotation motor up /down m otor rotation motor up/down motor rotation m otor
BA40-10- BA40-10- BA 40-10- BA40-10- BA40-10- BA40-10- BA40-10-
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-24 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The m ain control board

BA40-30-61356
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34
J10 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33
D D
BA40-20-61641
RSTCTL_RP2
RSTCTL_RP1
RSTCTL_RM
RSTCTL_SM
RSTCTL_SP
NCONFIG
TXD_RP2
RXD_RP1
RXD_RP2
RXD_RM
TXD_RP1
RXD_SM
TXD_RM
TXD_SM
REV1_O
REV2_O
REV3_O
REV4_O
RXD_SP
TXD_SP
REV5_I
REV6_I
DCLK
ASDO
DATA
GND
GND
GND
GND
NCE
NCS
GND
GND
GND
33
34
29
31
12
20
21
23
24
25
27
28
32
10
11
22
26
13
30
14
16
17
18
1
2
4
5
8
9
19
6
15
3
7
BA40-21-61740
BA40-21-61729
1red VCC 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 1 VCC 1red
Sample probe a rm up/dow n + 4white SU _PH O 2 J27 2 RS2 _PHO 4white +
C 2black 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 Second reagent syringe sense
sense
- G ND 3 3 G ND 2black C
- BA 40-21-
BA 40-21-
E 3green G ND 4 4 G ND 3green E
1red VCC 5 2 1 5 VCC
+ 4white SR_PHO 6 R2_RAM _H_PHO + Second reagent probe arm
Sample probe rotation sense C 2black 4 3 6 C protected from collision sense
BA40-21- G ND 7 7 G ND
- 1 2 - (H )
E 3green G ND 8 6 5 8 G ND E BA40-21-
3 4
C 1red
+ 4white VCC 9 8 7 9 VCC
+ C
Sample syringe sense C 2black
SS_PHO 10 5 6 10 RU 1_PHO
C First reagent probe arm
- G ND 11 10 9 11 GND - up/dow n sense
BA 40-21-
E 3green G ND 12 7 8 12 GND E BA40-21-
12 11
1red VCC 13 9 10 13 VCC
Sam ple probe protected from + 4white 14 14 13 J28 +
C 2black
S_RA M _H_PH O 14 RR1_PH O
C
First reagent probe arm
collisio n sense (H ) G ND 15 16 15 11 12 15 GND rotation sense
- -
BA40-21- 3green G ND 16 16 GND BA 40-21-
18 17 13 14
E 1red E
+ 4white VCC 17 15 16 17 VCC
+
Second reagent probe arm C 2black RU 2_PH O 18 20 19 18 RS1_ PHO
C
up/down sense - G ND 19 Three- probe drive 17 18 19 GND -
First reagent syringe sense
E 3green 22 21
G ND 20 20 GND BA 40-21-
BA40-21- E
24 23
board 19 20
1red VCC 21 21
Second reagent probe arm + 4white RR2_PHO 22 26 25
BA40-30-61361 21 22 22
VCC
R1 _RA M _H_PH O
+ First reagent probe arm
up/down sense C 2black G ND 23 23 GND
C protected fro m collision sense
- J26 23 24 - (H)
BA40-21-
E 3green G ND 24 24 GND E BA 40-21-
NC 25 25 26
25 VCC
+ R ea gent m ixer arm
NC 26 26 RM U_PHO up/dow n
27 28 C sense
27 GND -
28 BA 40-21-
29 30 GND E
1 6 31 32 29 VCC
30 RM R_PH O +
31 C R eagent m ixer arm rotation
2 7 33 34 GND - sense
B 32 GND E BA 40-21- B
+24V Yellow
+24V Yellow
GND Black
GND Black
10 GND Black
Red
-12V White
35 36
GND Black
GND Black
+12V Blue
3 8 J3
37 38 33 VCC +
4 9 34 SM U_PH O
C sa mple mixer arm up/do wn
BA40-21-61705 39 40 35 sense
1 +5V
G ND -
5 10 36 G ND E BA40-2 1-
2
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
J32 37 VCC
J31 38 SM R_PH O
+ Sam ple m ixer arm rotation
39 G ND
C sense
1 2 3 4 5 1 3 5 7 11 13 15 17 19
9 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 40 G ND E BA40-2 1-
J14
6 7 8 9 10 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
R1_VALUE_OUT Green
R2_VALUE_OUTGreen
Green
S_VALUE_OUT Green
RES_VALUE5 Green
RES_VALUE6 Green
RES_VALUE7 Green
RES_VALUE8 Green
RES_VALUE1 Green
RES_VALUE2 Green
RES_VALUE3 Green
RES_VALUE4 Green
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Power m odule
4 +12V
6 +12V
3 GND
5 GND
2 +12V
1 GND
BA40-30-61627
BA40-21-61679?
BA40-21-61747
RM_VALUE
SM_VALUE
GND
GND
+5V
GND
GND
GND
+5V
MINDRAY
1 black
1 black
1 black
red
red
red
11
10
20
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
9
8
1
5
6
2
2
Second reagent probe washing
Sample probe washing Inside

First reagent probe washing
A A
Three- probe drive board
J2 1 3 5 7 11 13 15 17 19
9 TITLE:
Inside valve
connecting diagram 2
Inside valve
BA40-21-
BA40-21-
BA40-21-
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
valve
File： Bytes：
Pum p/valve drive board DWG NO. A-BA40-30- REV 1.0
Date： Time： BA40-30-61373
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 7 OF 16 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-25
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
BA40-21-61778
1 VPP Red
J24 2 VEE J3
BA40-20-
3 CLOG_YES 1
1 2 1 2 1 SIG+
4 CLOG_MAY 2 2 I+
3 4 3 4
5 NO_SAM 3 3 I-
C 5 6 5 6 J1 Pressure sensors C
6 INT_CON 4 SIG-
7 8 7 8 4 BA40-20-
7 INT_EN 5 RA-
9 10 8 GND 9 10 5
6 RA+
9 RES_CLG_I 6
Three- probe drive 10 RES _CLG_O
board
Clot detection
BA40-30-61361 board
1 VPP Red
BA40-30-61367
J17 2 VEE J2
1 2 3 RX D_CLG 1 2
4 TXD_CLG
3 4 3 4
5 PSEN_CLG
5 6 5 6
6 RST_CLG
7 8 7 GND 7 8
8 GND
BA40-21-61779
B B
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE : Clot detection board connecting

diagram
File ： Bytes ：
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-26 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Sam ple probe First reagent probe Second reagent probe

BA40-20- BA40-20- BA 40-20-
black
black
black
red
red
red
BA40-21-61775
BA40-21-61774 BA 40-21-61775
2 SIGN
2 SIGN
2 SIGN
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
J1 1 2 J1 1 2 J1 1 2
Sam ple liquid level Ports ： J1 ~ J3 First reagent level Second reagent liquid
detection board detection board level detection board
C BA40-30-61369 BA40-30-61369 C
Port spare for debug ： J3 BA40-30-61369
J2 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4 J2 1 2 3 4
black 1
black 1
2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
black 1
2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
blue 2
3
3
green 3
red 4
red 4
red 4
green
1 LEVEL green
2 RAM_V_PHO
BA40-21-61776 BA40-20-61906 BA40-20-61907
1 LEVEL
1 LEVEL
2 +12V
2 +12V
2 +12V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
J21 1 2 J20 1 2 J22 1 2 J19 1 2 J23 1 2 J18 1 2
Three-probe drive
B
board B
BA40-30-61361
A
MINDRAY A
Level detection board connecting
TITLE :
diagram
File ： Bytes ：
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-27
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sample disk bar code Reagent disk bar code Sam ple disk status LED
reader reader BA40-20-
BA40-20- BA40-20-
Red
Black
D
BA40-21-61771
Red
Red
D
BA40-21-61772
BA40-21-61773
10 shield
10 shield
5 GND
8 TRIG
5 GND
8 TRIG
2 RXD
2 RXD
1 LAMP
3 TXD
3 TXD
7 RTS
7 RTS
1 VCC
1 VCC
2 GND
6 CTS
6 CTS
9 NC
9 NC
4 NC
4 NC
BA40-21-61751 J11 J12 J17
6brown B- 4brown
1
6 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10
1 2
Reaction disk rotation 4 4orangeB+ 3orange 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
J3
motor
3
BA 40-10-
BA40-20-61642
1 1red A+ 1red
4
BA40-21-61752 1 RXD_TC
6green B- 6green 2 TX D_TC
1
6 J24 J6
3 RSTCTL_TC
5blue +24V 5blue 4 GND
2
5
1 2 5 RXD_AW 1 2
Reaction disk rotation 4brown B+ 4brown
3
4 6 TXD_AW
3 4 3 4
J7
motor 3orange A- 3orange 7 RSTCTL_AW
C C
4
BA 40-10- 3 5 6 8 GND 5 6
2yellow +24V 2yellow Ports ： J1 ~ J27, J31 9 RXD_ST
5
2 7 8 10 TXD_ST 7 8
1red A+ 1red FPGA AS: J18 9 10 11 RSTCTL_ST 9 10
6
1 12 GND
BA40-30-61356
11 12 13 RXD_RT 11 12
FPGA JTAG : J19
Main board
BA40-2 1-61753 14 TXD_RT
Three-disk drive 13 14 13 14
1
6brown B- 4brown 15 RSTCTL_RT
6
board Ports spare: J13 ~ J16, J21, J25
15 16 16 GND 15 16
2
Reagent disk rotation 4 4orange B+ 3orange
17 18 17 RXD_REAC 17 18
BA40-30-61359
J4
motor 18 TX D_REAC
3 3yellow A- 2yellow 3 19 20 19 RSTCTL_REAC 19 20
BA 40-10-
20 GND
1 1red 1red 21 22
4
A+ 21 FPGA_CONF_OE 21 22
23 24 22 REV5_I 23 24
BA40-2 1-61754
23 REV2_O
1
25 26 25 26
6 6brown B- 4brown 24 GND
27 28 25 SPI_CS 27 28
2
Sam ple disk rotation 4 4orange B+ 3orange 26 SPI_CLOCK

J5
29 30 27 SPI_DATA 29 30
motor
3
BA 40-10- 31 32 28 GND 31 32
4
1 1red A+ 1red 29 DCLK

33 34 30 NCONFIG 33 34
31 ASDO
B BA4 0-21-61755 B
32 DATA
33 NCS
6 6brown B- 4brown
1
J8 34 NCE
J1
W ash unit up/down 4 4orangeB+ 3orange J22
2
motor
J6
3 3yellow A- 2yellow 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
3
BA 40-10- 1 2 3
1 1red A+ 1red 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8
4
Yellow
BA40-20-61909
Black
Red
2 SIGN
1 GND
3 VCC
8 SIGN Yellow
-12V Brown
+24V Yellow
BA40-21-61748
1 +24V Yellow
6 SIGN Brown
1 shield Yellow
5 GND White
BA40-21-61749
4 SIGN Black
Blue
3 GND Blue
7 SIGN Red
GND Black
GND Black
10 GND Black
2 SIGN Black
GND Black
11 GND Black
12 GND Black
+24V Yellow
+12V White
+5V
1 2 3
MINDRAY
4
6
2
3
9
7
8
5
J19 A
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 Three-disk drive board
J15 J1
Reagent TITLE : connecting diagram 1
7 8 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 refrigeration board
File ： Bytes ： BA40-30-61371
Power m odule DWG NO . A-BA40-30- REV 1.0
Date ： Time ： BA40-30-61627

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-28 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Slip ring
BA40-20-
Heat_dish3 White-purple 18
Heat_dish2 White-green 16
Heat_dish1 White-orange14
PT3_D_I White-black 11
PT3_S_I White-brown12
+24V White-blue 17
+24V White-yellow 15
PT3_S_O White 10
14 GND White-red 13
PT1_D_O Black 1
PT1_S_O Brown 2
Red 3
PT1_S_I Orange 4
PT2_D_O Yellow 5
PT2_S_O Green 6
Blue 7
Purple 8
Gray 9
D D
BA40-21-61677
BA40-21-61676
To shield
PT3_D_O
PT1_D_I
PT2_D_I
PT2_S_I
NC
BA40-21-61757
10
11
12
BA40-21-61766
5
4
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
7
8
1
1 SIG N R ed 1 VC C 1red
2 SIG N 2 AW _PHO 4whiter +
C W ash unit up/down sensor
3 SIG N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 G ND 2black - BA 40-21-
J50 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 G ND 3green
4 SIG N J2 E
5 GN D 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
5 VC C 1red +
2 1 6 SIG N 2 1 6 AW _V_PHO 4whiter W ash unit collisio n sensor
J10 1 2 G ND 2black C (H )
4 3
7 SIG N
4 3 J23 7 -
8 G ND 3green BA 40-21-
8 SIG N E
6 5 9 SIG N 6 5 3 4
9 VC C 1red +
8 7
10 SIGN
8 7 5 6 10 R T_PHO 4whiter C Reagent disk hom e position
11 SIGN
7 8 11 G ND 2black - sensor
10 9 12 SIGN 10 9 12 G ND 3green E BA 40-21-
13 SIGN
12 11 9 10
12 11 14 SIG N 13 VC C 1red
C 11 12 14 R TC _PHO 4whiter + C
14 13 15 GN D 14 13 C Reagent disk coder senso r
16 SIG N 15 G ND 2black - B A40-21-
16 15 13 14 16 G ND 3green
16 15 17 SIG N
18 SIG N 18 17 J26 15 16 1red E
18 17 17 VC C +
19 SIG N 17 18 18 ST_PHO 4whiter
20 19 20 19 19 2black C Sam ple disk hom e po sition
20 G ND G ND - sensor
19 20 20 G ND 3green E B A4 0-21-
Pump/valve drive
22 21 21 SIGN 22 21
BA40-30-61373
22 SIGN 21 22
24 23 24 23 21 VC C 1red
23 SIGN Three-disk drive board 23 24 22 STC _PHO 4whiter +
26 25 24 SIGN 26 25 23 2black C Sam ple disk coder sensor
board
G ND
25 G ND B A40-30-61359 25 26 24 G ND 3green
-
E
BA 40-21-
28 27 26 SIGN 28 27
27 SIGN
27 28 1red
30 29 30 29 25 VC C
+ Reaction disk hom e position
28 SIGN 29 30 26 RE AC _PH O 4whiter C
27 2black sensor
32 31 29 SIGN 32 31 G ND - B A4 0-21-
31 32 28 G ND 3green E
30 GND 34 33
34 33
31 VC C 33 34 29 VC C 1red
30 R EA CC _PH O 4whiter +
32 V CC C
33 VC C 31 G ND 2black -
R ea ction disk coder sensor
32 G ND 3green BA 40-21-
34 VC C E
33 NC
34 NC
J22 1 V CC Red
J27
B B
2 SIG N
1 2 1 2 1 SEN_W 1+ 1red W ash solution tem p. sensor 1
3 SIG N
2 SEN _W 1- 2white BA 40-21-
4 SIG N 3 4 1 2
3 4 1red
5 SIG N 3 SEN_W 2+
W ash solution tem p. sensor 2
5 6 5 6 3 4 4 SEN _W 2- 2white
6 GND J9 J20 BA 40-21-
7 SIG N J31 5 6 5 SEN_W 3+ 1red
7 8 7 8
8 SIG N 6 SEN _W 3- 2white W ash solution tem p. sensor 3
9 10 9 SIG N 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 4 6 8 10 7 8 BA 40-21-
7 GN D to shield
10 SIGN 1 3 5 7 9 8 NC
7 8 9 10 11 12
BA40-21-61767
BA40-21-61770
1 CA _W _1 1red W ash solution heater 1

2 VC C 2white BA 40-21-
1 SING 1red Detergent level sense
1black 2 GN D 2black B A40-21-
3 VC C W ash solution heater switch 1
4 VC C 2green B A40-21-
3 SING 1red W aste liquid buffer bottle level sense
BA40-21-61768 1red 4 GN D 2black B A4 0-21-
5
MINDRAY
CA _W _2
6 VC C 2white W ash solution heater 2 BA40-21-61769
BA 40-21- 5 SING 1red
6 GN D 2black concentrated bottle level sense
A 7 VC C 1black B A40-21- A
2green W ash solution heater switch 2
8 VC C T hree-disk drive board
B A40-21- 7
8
SING
GN D
1red Concentrated detergent B bottle level
2black
TITLE :
9 CA _W _3 1red
sense
B A4 0-21-
File ： Bytes ： 2white W ash solution heater 3
10 VC C
B A40-21- 9
10
SING
GN D
1red Co ncentrated detergent A bottle DWG NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date ： Time ： 2black level sense
11 VC C 1black B A40-21-
12 VC C 2green W ash solution heater switch 3
Software & Rev : Microsoft office Visio 2003
B A40-21-
SHEET 11 OF 16 SIZE A 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-29
BA40-21-61675
Slip ring line
6-30 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Heat sensitivity resistor Peltier cooler Peltier cooler Peltier cooler Peltier cooler
3001-21-07100 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633 BA30-10-06633
D D
2 black
2 black
2 black
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
BA40-20-61656
BA40-20-61648
BA40-20-61656
BA40-20-61656
BA40-20-61656
Control
Control
Control
VCC
Control
VCC
VCC
VCC
2 black
2 black
2 black
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
2 black
1 red
1 red
BA40-20-61908
BA40-20-61586 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
connection board
J7
BA40-30-61781
Vacuum pump
J1 J3 J4 J5 J6
1 black GND 1 black
1 24V Red 1 1
1 1 J7
2 FGND Black 2 red VCC 2 red
2 2 2
C 2 J17 Ports ： J1 ~ J21, P1, P2 C
J9 Yellow
3 12VFAN
3 3
Reserved ports ：
BA40-30-61627
Power module
4 SGND Green
4 4
Reagent refrigeration board J8, J9, J10, J11
1 12V Red 1 B A40-30-61371
1 J12, J13, J14
P1
2 12V Red 2
2 J22
Three-disk drive
BA40-30-61359
1 black GND 1 black
1 1
board
3 GND Black 1
1
P2 2 yellow SIGN 2 yellow
4 GND Black 2 J19 2 2
2
3 red VCC 3 red
3 3
BA40-20-61587 J18 J2 J15 J16 J20 J21
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
BA40-20-61909
B B
2 yellow
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
2 red
3 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
BA40-20-61652
BA40-20-61654
BA40-20-61654
BA40-20-61644
BA40-20-61646
BA40-20-61650
DATA
VCC
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
VCC
2 yellow
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
1 black
2 red
3 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
2 red
Cool fan Lamp fan PCB cooling fan PCB cooling fan Defog heater Defog temperature switch
BA 40-20- M 07-00062S--- 2100-20-08144 2100-20-08144 BA40- BA40-
A
MINDRAY A
R eagent refrigeration board
TITLE : connecting diagram
File ： Bytes ：
DWG NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-31
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BA40-21-61766
D D
BA40-21-61747
1 SIGN Red
1 +5V Red 2 SIGN
J22 3 SIGN
2 GND Black
J31 3 R1_VALUE_OUT Green J2 4 SIGN J2
4 GND 1 2 5 G ND
1 2 Black 1 2
5 R2_VALUE_OUT Green 1 2 6 SIGN
3 4 3 4 7 SIGN
6 GND Black 3 4 3 4
Three-probe drive board
7 S_VALUE_OUT Green 5 6 8 SIGN

5 6 5 6 9 SIGN 5 6
8 RM _VALUE Green
BA40-30-61361
9 SM _VALUE Green 7 8 10 SIGN

7 8 7 8 7 8
11 SIGN
10 GND Black 9 10
9 10 Red 9 10 12 SIGN 9 10
11 +5V
11 12 12 RES _VALUE1 Green 11 12 13 SIG N
11 12 14 SIGN
11 12
13 RES _VALUE2 Green 13 14
13 14 14 RES _VALUE3 Green 13 14 15 G ND 13 14
15 16 15 RES _VALUE4 G reen 15 16 16 SIGN
15 16 17 SIGN
15 16
16 RES _VALUE5 Green 17 18
17 18 18 SIGN 17 18
17 RES _VALUE6 Green 17 18 Pump/valve drive board 19 20 19 SIGN
19 20 18 RES _VALUE7 Green 19 20
19 20 B A40-30-61373 20 G ND
19 RES _VALUE8 Green 21 22 21 SIGN 21 22
20 GND Black
Three-disk drive
BA40-30-61359
23 24 22 SIGN
23 SIGN 23 24
C 25 26 24 SIGN C
25 26
board
27 28 25 G ND
26 SIGN 27 28
29 30 27 SIGN 29 30
31 32 28 SIGN
Ports ： J1 ~ J50 29 SIGN 31 32
33 34 30 GN D
33 34
31 VC C
J4 1 +12V
J1 R eserved ports ： 32 VC C
2 G ND 33 V CC
1 2 3 + 12V J18~J21, J23~J25
BA40-30-61627
1 2 34 VC C
Power module
4 G ND
3 4 5 + 12V 3 4 J31~J43, J46
5 6 6 GND
7 +12V 5 6 J50 J27
1 VC C Red
7 8 8 GND 7 8 2 SIGN
9 10 9 +24V 1 2 3 SIGN
1 2
10 GND 9 10
4 SIGN
11 12 11 +24V 3 4 3 4
11 12 5 SIGN
12 +24V 5 6 6 G ND 5 6
7 SIGN 7 8
7 8
8 SIGN
BA40-20-61807 9 10 9 SIGN 9 10
J47 J48 J49 J44 J45 10 SIG N
B
B
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
3yellow
3yellow
3yellow
BA40-21-61767
SENSOR_LIQUID_1 2black
SENSOR_LIQUID_2 4green
2black
2black
1red
1red
1red
1red
1red
BA40-21-61687
BA40-21-61689
BA40-21-61691
BA40-21-61683
A40-21-61685
SENSOR_LIQUID
SENSOR_LIQUID
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
Diluted wash solution A Diluted wash solution B Concentrated wash solution
W ater tank liquid level tank level sensor tank level sensor W aste tank level sensor
tank level sensor
MINDRAY
sensor BA40-20- BA40-20- BA40-20-
BA40-20-
BA40-20-
A A
Pum p/valve drive board
TITLE : connecting diagram
File ： Bytes ：
DWG NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-32 6 Hardware
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BA40-21-61681
BA40-21-61681
W ash solution A 1 Black V LAUE 1 VLAUE W ash solution A

1 1
control valve 2 Red +12V
J3 J13 2 +12V dilution valve
D BA40-30- 2 2 B A40-30- D
BA 40-21-61681 BA40-21-61681
W ash solution B 1 Black V LAUE 1 VLA UE Cuvette waste liquid

1 1
dilution valve J4 J14 out valve
2 Red +12V 2 +12V
BA40-30- 2 2 BA40-30-
BA 40-21-61681 BA40-21-61681
Norm al-concentration 1 Black V LAUE 1 VLAUE Dilution bottle pressure

1 1
waste out valve J5 J15 control valve
2 Red +12V 2 +12V
BA40-30- 2 2 BA40-30-
BA 40-21-61681 BA40-21-61681
V LAUE 1 VLAUE W ash solution B

High-concentration 1 Black
1 1
waste out valve J6 J16 2 +12V pressure release valve
2 Red +12V
BA40-30- 2 2 B A40-30-
C C
BA40-21-61681
BA 40-21-61681
Black
W ash solution A 1 V LAUE 1 VLAUE
1 1 W ipe block wash
release valve 2 Red +12V J7 J17 2 +12V valve B A40-30-
BA40-30- 2 2
BA 40-21-61681 BA40-21-61681
Pum p/valve drive board
1 Black V LAUE 1 VLAUE
Phase 2 washing 1 BA 40-30-61373 1 First reagent probe
control valve 2 +12V J8 outside wash valve
Red J26 2 +12V
BA40-30- 2 2 B A40-30-
BA 40-21-61681 BA 40-21-61681
Phase 3-6 washing 1 Black V LAUE 1 VLA UE Sam ple probe outside
1 1
control valve J9 wash valve
2 Red +12V J27 2 +12V
BA40-30- 2 2 B A40-30-
B BA40-21-61681 BA40-21-61681 B
W ash solution B 1 Black V LAUE 1 VLAUE
1 1 Sam ple m ixer wash
control valve J10
2 Red +12V J28 2 +12V valve
B A40-30- 2 2 BA40-30-
BA40-21-61681
BA40-21-61681
Phase 1 washing 1 Black V LAUE 1 VLA UE Reagent m ixer wash
1 1
control valve J11 J29 valve
2 Red +12V 2 +12V
BA40-30- 2 2 BA40-30-
BA40-21-61681
BA40-21-61681
1 V LAUE 1 V LAUE
Black 1 1 Second reagent probe
W ater In valve J12
2 +12V J30 2 +12V outside wash valve
BA40-30- Red
2 2
A
BA40-30-
MINDRAY A
TITLE : Pum p/valve drive board

File ： Bytes ：
DWG NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6 Hardware 6-33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
BA40-21-61701
NC
1
J1
3 Blue Line 2 Blue
2 BA40-21-61704
1 W hite Line 3 W hite

3 1 1 Red VCC
Vacuum pum p (220V) J2 J6
4 Orange Not used 4 Orange
4 2 Black GND W aste pum p
2
5 Red Connected 5 Red 5

C C
J3
2 Black Connected 6 Black
6
BA40-21-61702
BA40-20-61910
Vacuum pump 1 Black GND
Vacuum pum p connection board
1
cooling fan J8 BA 40-30-61781 1 AC1
2 Red VCC
3100-20-49437 2 2
J13
1 5 1 5
BA40-30-61627
3 AC2
Power module
BA40-21-61703
2 6 4 2 6
1 Red VCC J5
Pressure 1 3 7 5 3 7
protection switch J4
2 Black GND
2 6 ACINN
4 8 4 8
7
B B
8 ACINN
BA40-20-61908
1 1 Black GND
1
J7 J7
2 Red VCC
2 2
Reagent
refrigeration board
BA40-30-61371
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE:
TITLE : V acuum pum p connection board
File：
File ： Bytes ：
connecting diagram
DWG NO.
NO . A-B A40-30- REV 1.0
Date：
Date ： Time ：

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6-34 6 Hardware
7 Replacement of Other
Components and Parts
7.1 Overview
Tools used for replacement:
Hex wrench
Cross-head screwdriver
Adjustable wrench
BA40-J18-1
Blade
Seal tape
7.2 Enclosure and Panel

Left panel
Figure 7-1 Left panel and latch hooks
7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts 7-1

Figure 7-2 Left panel and its installation site
Securing methods:
Latch hooks
Retaining screws
Right panel
Figure 7-3 Right panel and its latch hooks
7-2 7 Replacement of Other Components and Parts

Figure 7-4 Right panel and its installation site
Installation site
of right panel
Retaining screws
Securing methods:
Latch hooks
Retaining screws
Components inside the front doors
Figure 7-5 Front doors and their hinges

Figure 7-6 Front doors
Securing methods:
Hinges
Front panel
Figure 7-7 Front panel
Securing methods:
Multiple retaining screws

Stop plates of left and right air vents
Figure 7-8 Left and right air vents
Rear panel
Figure 7-9 Rear panel of system
Securing methods:
Retaining screws.

7.3 Replacing Valves and Tanks
Vacuum tank
Figure 7-10 Vacuum container
Clean the vacuum tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in the groove of
the tank opening; use the fixture(BA40-J35-1) to tighten the tank cover.
Seal the vacuum tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Pressure tank
Figure 7-11 Pressure tank
Clean the pressure tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in the groove of
Seal the pressure tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.

Water tank
Figure 7-12 Water tank
Clean the water tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in the groove of
Seal the water tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Waste tank

Figure 7-13 Waste tank

NOTE:
When the washing of the waste tank is completed and you are about to
reassemble the it, please make sure the O-ring should be placed at the
right position on the mouth of the tank and be placed smoonthly to avoid
leakage after installation.
Diluted wash solution tank
Figure 7-14 Diluted wash solution tank
Clean the diluted wash solution tank cover and sealing ring; place the sealing ring in
the groove of the tank opening; use the fixture(BA40-J18-1) to tighten the tank cover.
Seal the diluted wash solution tank properly; otherwise air leakage may occur.
Valves on left of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 7-15 Valves on left of Hydropneumatic drawer
Use four M3X12 cross pan head screws with washer to respectively fix the 6 solenoid
valves 2 to the left bracket.
Use two M3X8 cross pan head screws with washer to respectively fix the 3 solenoid
valves 3 to the right bracket.
Precautions:
The valves SV08/SV09/SV10/SV28 have their outlets located on the silk side of the
left bracket and their inlets on the silk side of the right bracket.

Use four M3X12 stainless steel cross pan screws to fix the KNF diaphragm pump
(with shock pad) on the pump bracket. Use cross-head screwdriver and three M3X6
cross pan screws to fix the pump assembly on to the left valve bracket.
Valves on right of hydropneumatic drawer
Figure 7-16 Valves on right of Hydropneumatic drawer
7.4 Installing Sample Syringe

The following figure shows the sample syringe.
Figure 7-17 Sample Syringe
Perform the following steps to install the sample syringe:
1. Use four M4x10 socket head screws with washer to fix the drive part to the
syringe bracket.
2. Screw the T-piece to the syringe manually until secure. Be sure to place a plastic
washer between the T-piece and the syringe.
3. Use retaining screws to fix the drive module and its bracket to the framework of
the analyzer.

4. Install the syringe on the V-bracket, ensuring the upper end of the V-bracket
th
reach the 11 scale on the syringe; then use two space bars and four retaining
screws to fix the syringe on the V-bracket.
5. Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the lower retaining screw of the plunger
while the plunger moves downwards.
Precautions:
1. The T-piece of the sample syringe must be tightened.
2. While fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them alternately with
equilibrium force.
3. The sample syringe should be of 100µl.
7.5 Installing Reagent Syringe

The following figure shows the reagent syringe.
Figure 7-18 Installing Reagent Syringe
Perform the following steps to install the reagent syringe:
1. Use four M4x10 socket head screws with washer to fix the drive part to the
syringe bracket.
2. Screw the T-piece to the syringe manually until secure. Be sure to place a plastic
washer between the T-piece and the syringe.
3. Use retaining screws to fix the drive module and its bracket to the framework of
the analyzer.
4. Install the syringe on the V-bracket, ensuring the upper end of the V-bracket
th
reach the 7.5 scale on the syringe; then use two space bars and four retaining
screws to fix the syringe on the V-bracket.
5. Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the lower retaining screw of the plunger
while the plunger moves downwards.

Precautions:
1. The T-piece of reagent syringe differs from that of sample syringe in the upper
threaded hole, which is located on the top of the T-piece. Tighten properly the
T-piece to the reagent syringe and ensure that the threads on the syringe are not
damaged.
2. While fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them alternately with
equilibrium force.
3. The reagent syringe should be of 500µl.
7.6 Installing Power Supply Assembly

Power supply housing
Figure 7-19 Power supply housing
Inside view of power supply housing
Figure 7-20 Inside view of power supply housing
Radiating fans and shield

Figure 7-21 Radiating fans and shield

8 Service and Maintenance
To ensure reliability, good performance and service life of the system, regular
maintenance is required. Be sure to follow the instructions given below to maintain
the system. Even you’re only an operator, it’s very important for you to learn this
chapter. Your thorough understanding will help you obtaining the best performance of
the system.
WARNING
Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described
in this chapter.
Do not touch the components other than the ones specified in this
chapter.
Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures may damage your
system, void any applicable warranty or service contract and even
cause personal injury.
After performing any maintenance actions or procedures, ensure that
the system runs normally.
Do not spill water or reagent on mechanical or electrical components
of the system.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles during
maintaining process.
8.1 Preparation
The following tools, wash solution and ethanol may facilitate your maintenance.
8 Service and Maintenance 8-1

8.1.1 Tools
Hex wrenches (M1.5, M3 and M4)
Cross-headed screwdrivers (large, medium and small)
Needle tube
Tweezers
Clean gauze
scissors
8.1.2 Wash Solution

Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid
Alkaline: javel water with 0.5% active chlorine.
WARNING
Poisonous gas will be produced if acid wash solution is mixed with
alkaline wash solution. Do not mix the acid wash solution with the
alkaline one.
CAUTION
Mindray has specified the following enhanced wash solutions:
Acid wash solution: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid;
Alkaline wash solution: javel water with 0.5% active chlorine..
Be sure to use the enhanced wash solution specified by Mindray.
Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained.
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline wash solutions be used
alternately. For instance, if the acid wash solution is used at current
startup, the alkaline one should be used at next startup.
8.1.3 Others
Water-free ethanol
Disinfectant
8.2 Daily Maintenance

8.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes
Follow this procedure to check the sample and reagent syringes. The purpose of this
check is to ensure the syringes do not leak.
1 Place the Power to OFF.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the two reagent syringes
on the left and one sample syringe on the right.
3 Check whether the T-piece leaks and air bubbles exist in the syringe.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, find the reasons and replace the tubing, T-piece and connector if
necessary.
8-2 8 Service and Maintenance

4 Check whether the plunger guide cap leaks.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If yes, replace the cap.
5 Close the front doors of the analyzer.
8.2.2 Checking/Cleaning Sample Probe

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Reset and then click Execute to
clean the sample probe.
2 Check if the flow from inside the sample probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the sample probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the sample probe.
If the flow remains abnormal, check corresponding tubing and ensure the
water tank supplies water correctly with normal pressure.
8.2.3 Checking/Cleaning R1/R2 Probes

clean the reagent probe.
2 Check if the flow from inside the reagent probe is continuous and in the
direction of the probe. Check the exterior of the reagent probe to see
whether the flow is continuous and normal.
If not, clean the reagent probe.
If the flow remains abnormal, check corresponding tubing and ensure the
water tank supplies water correctly with normal pressure.
8.2.4 Checking/Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers

clean the mixer.
2 During the cleaning process, check whether the mixer rotates correctly
and water surge in the wash well of mixer works normally.
If not, check corresponding tubing and ensure the water tank supplies
water correctly with normal pressure.
8.2.5 Checking Connection of Deionized Water

1 Open the front doors of the analyzer.
2 Pull out the hydropneumatic drawer. Check if the inlet ball valve is turned
on (the handle of ball valve is placed level) and DI water exists in the water
tank.

3 Check all connectors for leakage. If leakage does exist, find the reasons
and take actions accordingly.
4 Restore the drawer.
6 If the water unit is equipped, please ensure it is properly connected to the
analyzer.
7 Check if the water unit is powered on.
CAUTION
Make sure the tubing in the hydropneumatic drawer is neither clogged
nor bent.
8.2.6 Checking Waste Tubing
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves and lab coat
and, if necessary, goggles when checking the waste tubing.
Check if the waste drainage system works normally. Ensure the waste tubing is
neither bent nor clogged, and the high-/low-concentration waste is handled properly
according to local regulations and rules for waste disposal.
CAUTION
Ensure the waste tubing is neither clogged nor bent. Clogged or bent
waste tubing may lead to waste overflow that can damage your analyzer.
8.2.7 Checking Vacuum/Pressure Pumps

1 Ensure the analyzer is in Standby status.
2 Open the front doors of the analyzer and check the readings on the
vacuum/pressure gauges.

NOTE
The readings and reference ranges for vacuum and pressure
are:
Primary pressure gauge: 25.0 psig; Reference range:
0.16-0.18MPa.
Secondary pressure gauge: 5.0 psig; Reference range:
0.03-0.035MPa.
DI water pressure gauge: 10.0 psig; Reference range:
0.06-0.07Mpa.
Vacuum gauge: 27.0Hg (lower than -0.08MPa).
3 If the vacuum/pressure readings are incorrect, adjust the 5psi and 10psi
gauges for pressure regulating valves and adjust the 25psi gauge for the
air pump. Make sure the 25psi gauge is prior.
8.2.8 Checking Printer/Printing Paper

Check if the power and status indicators on the printer are illuminated correctly, and if
sufficient paper is prepared.
8.2.9 ISE Unit (optional)
8.2.9.1 Daily Cleaning
BIOHAZARD
To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and
protective clothing when doing the below checks.
The cleaning solution is irritating to eyes and skin. Avoid contact with
skin and eyes. In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with
plenty of water and seek medical advice.
CAUTION
Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables
may degrade system performance.
Add solution supplied in the cleaning solution kit to top of label on the
powder bottle that is also supplied in the same kit and shake well to
prepare the cleaning solution.
The cleaning solution must be stored at 2-8°C and d iscarded after two
weeks.

NOTE
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
You should perform the maintenance once a day after all the samples
are analyzed. Besides, if the samples of a day requested for the ISE
tests are 50 or more, you should perform the maintenance after 50
samples are analyzed.
If you give the electrodes some time to stabilize after cleaning, you will
experience slightly better performance.
1 Enter the ISE screen of the Maintenance of the system software.

2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start the
clean cycle.
4 After cleaning, if there are samples requested for the ISE tests to be run,
calibration should be run first. But Mindray recommends running an ISE
calibration after cleaning.
ISE unit daily cleaning can be configured to operate automatically.
8.2.9.2 Pump Calibration

2 Select Pump Calibration Cycle from the Instructions list.
3 Select Execute. The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start
calibrating the peristaltic pumps.
Pump calibration can be configurated to operate automatically.
8.2.10 Checking the Drying Module

Check the whether the liquid level in air filter (AF20-02C), oil-mist separator（AFM20-02C）
and mist separator (AFD20-02C) reaches the bottom of the filter core as indicated in the red
line of the following figure. The remaining liquid in them should not reach the bottom of the
filter core (liquid remaining is normal phenomenon. A certain volume of liquid will remain in
the container and can not be emptied. The maximum dead volume is indicated by the blue
circe in the following figure). If the level is reached which indicates the something wrong
with the drainage, you need to contact the service department. The maintenance method is
as follows: Power off the system and loosen the drain caps or screw at the bottom of the oil
mist separator, mist separator by hand. (the direction is in consistence with the arrow).
Reverse it to fasten the drain cap until the water inside can flow out one drop by one drop.
Do not completely loosen the cap, otherwise, leakage will occur. A certain amount of liquid
should remain in them.

8.3 Weekly Maintenance
8.3.1 Cleaning Sample Probe
WARNING
The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national
guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk.
3 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move
the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and
convenient to operate.
4
CAUTION
Do not contact the sample probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the sample probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the sample probe.

NOTE
Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline wash solution be
used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid
wash solution is used for last maintenance, the alkaline one
should be used for this time.
Use wash solution (acid or alkaline) or ethanol-dipped gauze to gently wipe

the exterior of the sample probe until it is clean and smooth.
5 Wipe the sample probe with DI water-dipped gauze.

6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the sample disk, tighten the two retaining screws on it and then cover
the sample compartment.
8 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the sample
probe and rinse it with deionized water.
8.3.2 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes
WARNING
The reagent probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the reagent
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk by pulling
upwards the handles.

3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
4
CAUTION
Do not contact the reagent probe directly with tweezers;
otherwise the reagent probe may be scratched. Excessive
force may bend the reagent probe.
NOTE
used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid wash
solution is used for last maintenance, the alkaline one should
be used for this time.
Use acid or alkaline wash solution-dipped gauze to gently wipe the

exterior of reagent probe until it is clean and smooth.

5 Wipe the reagent probe with DI water-dipped gauze.
6 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
7 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the
reagent probe and rinse it with deionized water.
8.3.3 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the mixer arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
mixer to a position convenient to operate.

3
CAUTION
Do not contact the mixer directly with tweezers; otherwise it
may be scratched. Excessive force may bend the mixer.
NOTE
used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid
wash solution is used for last maintenance, the alkaline one
should be used for this time.
Use acid or alkaline wash solution-dipped gauze to gently wipe the mixer
until it is clean and smooth.
4 Wipe the mixer with DI water-dipped gauze.

5 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset the mixer
automatically and rinse it with deionized water.
CAUTION
The mixer is precisely fabricated. In case of scratched or bent mixer,
replace it according to 8.9.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers.
8.3.4 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Bar Code Reader

Windows
CAUTION
Do not stare at the laser of the bar code reader; otherwise your eyes
may get hurt.

2 Uncover the reagent or sample compartment, and remove the reagent disk
or sample disk.
3 Use the wash solution-dipped gauze to wipe the bar code reader window.
4 Install the reagent disk or sample disk and cover the compartment.
5 Place the Power to ON. After about 30 seconds, the system will reset
automatically.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp-edged tools to scratch the bar code reader window.
8.3.5 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment
WARNING
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the sample
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by pulling
upwards the handle.
3 Rinse the sample disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.
4 Wipe the inside of the sample compartment using clean gauze or, if
necessary, the gauze dipped with water or disinfectant.

5 Install the sample disk and tighten the two retaining screws on it. Then
cover the sample compartment.
8.3.6 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and loosen the screws on the reagent
disk. Then remove the reagent disk.
3 Rinse the reagent disk with fresh water and dry it with gauze.
4 Wipe the inside of the reagent compartment using clean gauze or, if
necessary, the gauze dipped with water or disinfectant.

5 Install the reagent disk and together the screws on it. Then cover the
reagent compartment.
8.3.7 Cleaning Panels of Analyzing Unit
WARNING
The probe/mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe/mixer.
BIOHAZARD

2 Wipe the panels using clean gauze or, if necessary, the gauze dipped with
water or disinfectant.
8.3.8 Cleaning Reaction Cuvettes

Contaminated reaction cuvettes may lead to incorrect results. The reaction cuvettes
should be cleaned regularly.
1 Place a 60ml bottle filled with diluted concentrated wash solution

（concentrated wash solution:DI water=1:10）on specified position of
reagent disk.
2 On the Daily Maint. page, select Cuvette Cleaning and then click
Execute. All cuvettes on the reaction disk are washed.
8.3.9 Checking Photometer

Reaction cuvettes and light source should be checked regularly and replaced if
necessary, for contaminated reaction cuvettes and low transmittance may affect the

test results; also weak stability and radiation intensity of the light source will cause
unreliable test results.
Aside from the regular check, checking should be done after the replacement of
cuvettes and lamp.
8.3.9.1 Checking Reaction Cuvettes

After performing enhanced wash of the reaction cuvettes, proceed with the following
steps to check the cuvettes.
1 Enter the Daily Maint. page of the Utilities screen; then select
Cuvette/Lamp Check in the Maintenance area and click Execute.

2 Cuvette check
The photometer check includes cuvette check and lamp check. Select
cuvette check first.
Time for cuvette check: 20 min
On this page, you can view the status of the latest cuvette check.
Different status is marked as four different colors:
Not marked: Normal
Yellow: out of consistance limit ( compared with the cuvette of min ABS, the
difference is above 1410)
Blue:out of uniformity limit.
Red: out of consistence and uniformity limits.
NOTE:
To ensure the good performance of the photometer, replace
those cuvettes marked with yellow, blue or red. Run cuvette
check after replacement, and save the data.
Place DI water in position W. Click Start. After test, the cuvette status will
be refreshed according to the test result. Click Save to save the result.
NOTE:
If Save is not selcted, the current test result will not be saved.
Next time when you enter this page, the cuvette status will be the
previous test result.

Click Results to view and print the latest ABS value of all the cuvette.
In Cuvette Status page, manually enter the cuvette position or use

to view the test result of any cuvette. The judgement is shown
in Current field. Cuvettes marked as yellow, blue or red will be judged as
dirty cuvettes.

3 Lamp check
NOTE:
Before running lamp check, replace those cuvettes marked as
yellow, blue and red.
Click Lamp check to enter the lamp checking page as shown in the
following figure.
Time for lamp check: 1.5min
In Lamp check page, you can view the latest two lamp check results. The
displayed value is the average of five consecutive cuvette aborsorbance.
When this value is larger than 10458, the lamp intensity is not strong
enough.
Click Start to start the lamp check. The test result and the lamp status will
be refreshed after the test. Click Save to save the result.
NOTE:
If Save is not selcted, the current test result will not be saved.
Next time when you enter this page, the lamp status will be the
previous test result.
NOTE:
To ensure the good performance of the photometer, replace the
lamp when the light intensity is not strong enough.
You can readjust the gain after replacing the lamp. When the water blank is
adjusted to 47000-49000, the photoelectric parameter of the 340nm should
not be less than 50.

8.3.10 Checking Concentrated Wash Solution
WARNING
Always wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles when
checking the wash solution.
If there is no enough concentrated wash solution, system operation may be

interrupted. Perform the following procedures to check the wash solution.
1 On the Daily Maint. page, select System Prime and then click Execute.
2 The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start
3 Open the front doors of the analyzer and pull the hydropneumatic assembly
drawer outwards.
4 Check if the concentrated wash solution reagent box is empty.

If yes, replace it with a new one.
8.4 Two-week Maintenance

8.4.1 Maintaining Hydropneumatic Components
When the system is used for a long period of time, condensed water will accumulate
in the oil mist separator, mist separator. You are recommended to perform the
following steps to empty the separators every two weeks.

2 Loosen the drain caps or screw at the bottom of the oil mist separator, mist
separator by hand. The fluid in the separators is drained automatically by gravity.
3 After all the liquid in the separators is removed, tighten the drain
caps.
8.5 Monthly Maintenance

8.5.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used cotton swabs in accordance with your local or
national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.

2 Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to
move the sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and

3 Use cotton swabs to clean the inside of and the places around the wash
well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to
move the sample probe to a position above the wash well.
“System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse
the sample probe automatically.
8.5.2 Cleaning Wash Well of R1/R2 Probes
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to

well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the reagent probe to a position above the wash well.
the reagent probes automatically.
8.5.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample/Reagent Mixers
WARNING
The mixer tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the mixer.
BIOHZARD


well.
4 After cleaning, gently pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate the
arm to move the mixer to a position above the wash well.
the mixers automatically.
8.5.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Pull the probe arm to the highest point, then rotate the arm to move the
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and

3 Wipe the sample probe rotor with clean gauze.
8.5.5 Cleaning R1/R2 Probes Rotors
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

reagent probe to a position above the reagent compartment and
3 Wipe the reagent probe rotor with clean gauze.

8.5.6 Cleaning Sample/Reagent Mixers Rotors
WARNING
BIOHAZARD

3 Wipe the mixer rotor with clean gauze.
8.5.7 Checking Wash Unit

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Wash Unit Maintenance and then click
Execute.
2 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening
and the lower part to other wash probes. Adjust the wipe block if
necessary.

3 Check the wash probes for stains and cracks, and replace the probes if
any.
Check Wash Unit

1 On the Daily Maint. page, select Wash Unit Maintenance and then click
Execute.
2 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening and the
lower part to other wash probes. Adjust the wipe block if necessary.
3 Check the wipe block for contamination and crack. Replace the wipe block if
necessary.
Clean Wipe Blocks

1 Loosen the retaining screw of the wash station and dismount the whole wash
unit.
Retaing screw of the

wash unit

2 Rub the wipe blocks with gauze soaked with ethanol until the dust or other
contamination on the wipe blocks are off.
3 Rub the wipe blocks with gauze soaked with DI water until the surface of the
wipe block is clean.
CAUTIONS:
Exercise caution when cleaning the wipe block. Excessive
force may deviate the angel of the wipe block. If that
happens, you should readjust it.

4 Reinstall the wash unit to the holder. The two guide pins on the holder should
be inserted into the guide holes of the wash unit. Fasten the retaining screws
manually.
Guide
pin of
the
wash
unit
Guide
hole of
the
wash
unit
Align The Wipe Blocks and the opening of the cuvettes

2 Manually move the wash unit downward vertically until the wipe blocks reach
the opening of the reaction cuvettes.
3 Check if the upper part of the wipe block is level to the cuvette opening. If not,
adjust the angel of the wipe blocks slightly. Please pay attention that the
thinner part of the wipe blocks should face outward.
The
thinner
part of the
wipe
blocks
should
face
outward.
The wipe block

is level to the
cuvette
opening

4 After alignment, manually insert the wash station wipe blocks into the cuvettes.
Check whether the wipes blocks fits into the cuvettes and whether the wipe
blocks are level to the cuvette walls.
8.5.8 Checking Hydropneumatic Drawer

2 Pull outwards the hydropneumatic drawer.
3 Check if the tubing connectors are leaking or water buildup exists below
the drawer.
If yes, find the reasons and take actions accordingly.

4 Push the drawer inward to restore it.
8.5.9 Cleaning Air Filter, Oil Mist Separator, Mist Separator

1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
2 Remove the bottles of the air filter, oil mist separator and mist separator.
3 Clean the bottles using neutral cleaning solution.

4 Install the bottles back to the bracket.
8.5.10 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

To ensure the accuracy of the test, the reaction cuvette should be replaced regularly.
After being used for a long period, carrayover might happen because the inner
surface of the cuvette may get scratched and the outer surface of the cuvette may get
contaminated to result in unaccurate result.

WARNING:
The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent
injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient for
operation.
BIOHAZARD:
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
CAUTION:
Please use our recommended consumables. Other consumables may
degrade the system performance.
1 Place the Power to OFF

2 Rotate manually the probes and mixers to a position convenient for cuvette
replacement.
3 Remove the reaction disk cover.

CAUTION:
Do not get the reaction disk cover to collide with the wash unit,
when removing the reaction disk cover.

4 Slowly rotate the reaction disk to a position easy to handle.
CAUTION:
Do not drag the optical fibire under the reaction disk.
5 Pull the bullet at the side of the cuvette out with a nipper.
CAUTION:
If your system is installed with hard glass cuvettes, please take
extra care while removing the bullet with the nipper lest the
cuvette get damaged. Use the nipper to clip the protuberance of
the bullet and then pull it out.

6 Use the hand to pinch the side walls of the reaction cuvette and pull it out.
CAUTION:
The gloves should free from fibres and power, otherwise the
optical surface of the cuvette and its neighboring cuvettes might
get contaminated.
7 Install new cuvettes.
CAUTION:
The optical surface of the cuvette should be perpendicular to the
radial direction of the reaction disk.
Press the cuvettes into the bottom of their position on the disk
until no further can be pushed downward.
Do not touch the optical surface of the cuvettes, otherwise the
result might not be reliable. The optical surface is highlight by red
circle in the following figures for glass cuvette and plastic cuvette
respectively.

8 Install the bullets
CAUTION:
Check for cuvettes and bullets that are forgotten to be installed. If
only one cuvette is not installed, the reagent, sample and wash
solution will spill on the reaction disk, making the analysis unable
to proceed.
9 Install the reaction disk back.

CAUTION:
While installing the reaction disk cover, please ensure the two
parts highlighted in the following figure fit into each other. Do not
make the cover collide with the wash unit.
10 Power on the analyzing unit and start the operating software. Check the cuvette
by entering the Utilities-Cuvette/Lamp check screen to make sure all the
cuvettes meet the requirement for use. Please refer to 5.3.8.1.
CAUTION:
In order to get the best data, check the cuvette when the lamp is
stable (that is about at least 20 minutes after startup).

8.6 Three-month Maintenance
8.6.1 Cleaning Dust Screens
1 Place the Main Power to OFF.
3 Remove the dust screens that are located below the reagent syringes and
sample syringe.
Hold the screen with your hands and lift it upwards, then remove it
outwards.
4 Rinse the dust screen with fresh water and dry it by air.
5 Install the dust screens correctly.
8.7 Six-month Maintenance

8.7.1 Replacing Lamp
The lamp of the photometric system ages after a certain period of service. An aged
lamp may introduce extra noise during the analyzing process. Replace the lamp
when its intensity decreases to the specified degree, or the service time of the lamp
has added up to 1,500 hours or system prompts.

CAUTION:
decrease the system performance.
Do not touch either the light entrance of the lamp or the lens in front of
the lamp. In case the entrance is dirty, clean it with ethanol-soaked
absorbent cotton.
1 Place the MAIN POWER to OFF. Wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp and
its housing to cool down.
WARNING:
After working for a while, the lamp and its housing are usually
hot enough to burn you. Do not proceed with this procedure
until they have cooled down.
2 The light source assembly is at the right rear part of the instrument.
Unscrew the two retaining screws on the back cover by using a screw
driver. Loosen the two retaining screwers on the upper part. Remove the
back cover.
3 Unplug the fan power cable from the socket. Uncscrew the two air duct
retaining screws by using a screw driver. Pull the air duct out.
Fan power
cable
Air duct
retaining
screws

4 Unscrew the lower screw at the back of the lamp housing. Pull the radiator
plate out.
Radiator plate
retaining
crews
5 Please wear the glove to protect the circuit boards from ESD. Press the
lever and then pinch the lamp base and pull out the lamp.
Lever

6 Pinch the new lamp by its base and insert the lamp pins into the mounting
holes. Press the lamp base until it reaches the bottom of the hole by using
both of your thumbs.
NOTE:
The larger pin is inserted into the larger hole and the smaller
pin into the smaller hole. The lamp should be pressed to the
bottom of the mounting hole. Otherwise, performance wil be
affected.
Don’t pinch the bulb of the lamp so that the lamp will not be
contaminated or broken.
7 Install the lamp housing radiator back. Tighten the screws at the lower part
of the housing.
8 Install the air duct back and tighten the retaining screws. Reconnect the fan
power cable.
9 Close the back cover of the analyzing unit and tighten the four retaining
screws.
8.7.2 Replacing or Cleaning Air Screen

After using the air screens for a long time, replace the air screens that are bad in
ventilation.
8.7.3 Cleaning Tanks, Floater Switch and Siphon Tube

Remove and install all tanks, clean the tanks and internal parts. See 7.3Replacing
Valves and Tanks.
8.7.4 Maintaining the Air Pump

Replace the air pump and silencer if necessary. See 5.8Structure of Air Pump
Assembly.

8.7.5 Replacing Waste Tubing
If the waste tubing cannot discharge waste smoothly after being used for a long time,
replace it with the specified one.
8.7.6 Replacing First and Second Phase Washing Tubing

on Wash Unit

2 Disconnect the dirty tubing beteen the aspiration wash probe (in the front, the
longer straight probe) and the collecting board. (The No. for the first phase
washing tubing is 12, and 11 for the second phase washing tubing.). Pull the
tubing out from the tubing fixer.

3 Connect one end of the new tubing to the wash probe, and the other passing
through the tubing fixer to its respective adapter on the collecting board. (Be sure
the old tubing sign is added to the new tubing.
8.7.7 Replacing DI Water Filter and the Tubing

The deionized water filter should be replaced by the user in every 3-6 months. If you
find the 91 and 92 tubing is dirty during the replacement of filter, replace them as well.
Perform the following steps:
1 Turn off the ball valve on the hydropneumatic drawer. The water supply
module is powered off.

2 Turn on the ball valve on the water supply module to release the remaining
pressure. When the pressure gauge indicates 0, turn off the ball value.
3 Press the tubing release button to remove the tubing 91 and 92 from two
ends of the old filter assembly. (If these tubings are dirty, replace them)
4 Connect the tubing 91 and 92 to the two ends of the new filter assembly.
5 Power on the water supply module, turn on the ball valve on it and wait for
5 minutes. When you see the VENT of the water supply module is
supplying water continuously which sigifies the normal working of the
module, turn off its ball valve.
6 Turn on the ball valve on the hydropneumatic drawer.
8.7.8 Replacing On-line Filters
8.7.8.1 Replacing On-line Filters

The on-line filter should be replaced every 6 months.
1 Place the MAIN POWER to OFF.

2 Open the drawer and locate the following 3 filters.
One is located at the left side of the drawer, at the outlet of the concentrated wash
solution reagent box, between tubing 115 and 116. Please see the following figure.
One is located at the left side of the drawer, at the outlet of the concentrated wash
solution container, between the tubing 118 and 119. Please see the following figure.

One is located at the right side of the drawer, at the outlet of the diluted wash solution
container, between the tubing 123 and 124. Please see the following figure.
3 After replacing the new filter, reconnect the tubings. If you discover the end of the
tubing is distorted, use sccissors to cut a small part of the tubing and then reconnect
the tubings to ensure good connection. You do not have to pay attention to the direction
of the tubing, while mounting the filter.
4 Check the conncection of the tubings and whether leakage happens at the adapters.

8.7.9 Wash glass cuvette (Optional)
The glass cuvette might get contaminated by serum and crumb after long time use,
thus the incorrect measurement might yield. We suggest you to wash all the cuvettes
every 6 months.
WARNING:
Please take care during operation to avoid being hurt by the sample probe or
reagent probe.
Put the probes and bars at the place that is convenient to handle during
replacement.
BIOHAZARD:
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles. Dispose of the
replaced cuvettes properly.
NOTE:
degrade the system performance.
1 Power off the analyzing unit.

replacement.
3 Remove the reaction disk cover.

CAUTION:
Do not get the reaction disk cover to collide with the wash unit,
when removing the reaction disk cover.

4 Slowly rotate the reaction disk to a position easy to handle.
CAUTION:
Do not drag the optical fibire under the reaction disk.
5 Pull the bullet at the side of the cuvette out with a nipper.
CAUTION:
If your system is installed with hard glass cuvettes, please take
extra care while removing the bullet with the nipper lest the
cuvette get damaged. Use the nipper to clip the protuberance of
the bullet and then pull it out.

6 Use the hand to pinch the side walls (the frost side) of the reaction cuvette and
pull it out.
CAUTION:
The gloves should free from fibres and power, otherwise the
optical surface of the cuvette and its neighboring cuvettes might
get contaminated.
7 If consipucuous condensation of reagent is observed on the outside wall of the

cuvette, we suggest you to clean it with absolute alcohol and then put the cuvette
in a open container filled with 10% concentrated wash solution. Cover the
container and put it in room temperature for 2 hours.
CAUTION:
The cuvettes should be soaked completed in the wash solution.
No bubble in the inside of the cuvette, otherwise the quality of the
wash might be affected.
8 Take the cuvettes out of the open container and wash them with DI water
thoroughly. Rub the outside surface of the cuvette with clean and dry gauze.
CAUTION:
If scratch or unremovable contamination occurs on the optical
surface of the cuvette, please dispose of them properly and
replace them with new ones.
Do not use the cotton swab, cotton, cotton cloth or any other tools
containing fibres to clean the cuvette, otherwise the fibres might
get on the optical surface of the cuvette and the result might be
affected.

9 Install new cuvettes.
CAUTION:
The optical surface of the cuvette should be perpendicular to the
radial direction of the reaction disk. The optical surface is
highlight by red circle in the following figures for glass cuvette and
plastic cuvette respectively.
Press the cuvettes into the bottom of their position on the disk
until no further can be pushed downward.
Do not touch the optical surface of the cuvettes, otherwise the
result might not be reliable.
10 Install the bullets
CAUTION:
Check for cuvettes and bullets that are forgotten to be installed. If
only one cuvette is not installed, the reagent, sample and wash
solution will spill on the reaction disk, making the analysis unable
to proceed.

11 Install the reaction disk back.
CAUTION:
While installing the reaction disk cover, please ensure the two
parts highlighted in the following figure fit into each other. Do not
make the cover collide with the wash unit.
12 Power on the analyzing unit and start the operating software. Check the cuvette
by entering the Utilities-Cuvette/Lamp check screen to make sure all the cuvettes
meet the requirement for use. Please refer to 5.3.8.1.
CAUTION:
In order to get the best data, check the cuvette when the lamp is
stable (that is about 20 minutes after startup).
8.8 Yearly Maintenance

8.8.1 Maintaining the Air Pump
If used for a long time, the Filter lilencer (Filter silencer,F02,BSPT1/4") will be blocked
and the flow volume will be reduced. So, the silencer should be replaced every year.
Replace the tubing if necessary.
1 Plece the Main Power to OFF.

2 Open the right plate of the system, and unplug the vacuum and pressure
tubing. Open the board of the pump.

3 Unplug the tubing connecting the silencer, and detach the silencer hold
connector.
4 Replace the old silencer with a new one.
5 Check the internal tubing. If dust is collected, replace it.

6 Install the silencer holder connector into the air pump assembly, insert the
tubings and install the board back.
7 Insert the pressure and vacuum interface tubing. Install the right plate.

8.9 As-Needed Maintenance
8.9.1 Unclogging Sample Probe
When the sample probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the sample probe.
8.9.1.1 Removing Sample Probe
WARNING
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the sample compartment and remove the sample disk by pulling
upwards the handle.
sample probe to a position above the sample compartment and convenient
to operate.

4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover with your hands and pull them slightly
outwards and then remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5 Hold the sample probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other hand. Rotate the tubing connector
counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the sample probe. Remove the
tubing from the probe.
6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit connector
from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit
board.
7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the sample

probe and take out the spring.

8
WARNING
Store the removed sample probe in a safe place where it will
neither endanger people working around the area nor be
damaged.
NOTE
Exercise caution when pulling the sample probe away from
the arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage
the probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.
NOTE
The sample probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. In case of scratched or bent sample probe,
replace it.
8.9.1.2 Unclogging Sample Probe
WARNING
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
1 Use a needle to unclog the sample probe from the tip.
CAUTION
replace it.

8.9.1.3 Installing Sample Probe
WARNING
prevent injury, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Insert the sample probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the hole on
probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.
3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
4 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe
upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If yes, proceed to the next step.

If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5 Connect the sample probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Screw clockwise the probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.

CAUTION
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.
7 Power on the analyzer after confirming that the sample probe is not in contact
with any conductible matter (like hands).
8 Manual adjustment: Obeserve the D2 indicator (yellow). The D2 indicator will
be on 2 seconds after the power of the analyzer is on. Press the switch of the
level sensing board S2. D2 indicator also goes through a process of OFF-ON
procedure which indicates the adjustment is successfully completed. (During
the process of adjustment, please make sure the probe is not in contact with
any conductible matter).
9 Fill the clean open container with DI water. Put the tip of the sample probe 2-3
mm under the water level. The indicator D5 on the level sensing board will go
through a process of OFF-ON procedure. After the tip of the sample probe is
taken way from the water, the indicator D5 will go off, which shows the function
of the board is normal. Proceed to the next step.
1 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm base.
0
1 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe
1 upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.

1 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the probe to
2 a position above the wash well.
CAUTION
After installation, be sure to move the sample probe to a
position above its wash well.
1 Install the sample disk and cover the sample compartment.

3
1 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute “System
4 Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse the sample
probe automatically.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.9.2 Unclogging R1/R2 Probes

When the reagent probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow this
procedure to remove, unclog and install the reagent probe.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
8.9.2.1 Removing Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Uncover the reagent compartment and remove the reagent disk.

3 Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point. Then rotate the arm to
4 Grab the lower part of the arm cover and pull them slightly outwards and
remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5 Hold the reagent probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing
connector with the other hand. Rotate the tubing connector
counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the reagent probe. Remove the
tubing from the probe.
6 Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the circuit connector
from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector.
Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit
board.
7 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw on the reagent

probe and take out the spring.
8
WARNING
Store the removed reagent probe in a safe place where it will
neither endanger people working around the area nor be
damaged.
NOTE
Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm
so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the
probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that
the gasket inside the probe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a
clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been
disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling
precision be affected.

NOTE
The reagent probe is precisely fabricated for accurate
aspiration/dispensing. In case of scratched or bent reagent probe,
replace it.
8.9.2.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national
1 Use a needle to unclog the reagent probe from the tip.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.9.2.3 Installing Reagent Probe
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

2 Insert the reagent probe back into the hole on probe arm, and align the hole on
probe plate to the rotor inside the arm.
3 Sleeve the spring on the rotor and screw the retaining screw to secure.
4 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.

5 Connect the reagent probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6 Screw the probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when connecting the sample probe.
Excessive force may bend the probe.
7 Power on the analyzer after confirming that the reagent probe is not in contact
with any conductible matter (like hands).
8 Manual adjustment: Obeserve the D2 indicator (yellow). The D2 indicator will
be on 2 seconds after the power of the analyzer is on. Press the switch of the
level sensing board S2. D2 indicator also goes through a process of OFF-ON
procedure which indicates the adjustment is successfully completed. (During
the process of adjustment, please make sure the probe is not in contact with
any conductible matter).

9 Fill the clean open container with DI water. Put the tip of the reagent probe 2-3
mm under the water level. The indicator D5 on the level sensing board will go
through a process of OFF-ON procedure. After the tip of the sample probe is
taken way from the water, the indicator D5 will go off, which shows the function
of the board is normal. Proceed to the next step. See 8.9.1.3 Installing
Sample Probe for details.
10 Install the probe arm and make sure it is clicked properly into the arm base.
11 Pinch the reagent probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the
probe upward and then release it to see if the spring can move freely.
If not, reinstall the arm cover and check the spring.
12 Gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate it to move the reagent
probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION
After cleaning, be sure to move the reagent probe to a

position above its wash well.
13 Install the reagent disk and cover the reagent compartment.

14 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds and then execute “System
Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset and rinse the reagent
probes automatically.
CAUTION
replace it.
8.9.3 Replacing Sample Probe

If the sample probe is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it
immediately.

WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
Please use Mindray-recommended consumables. Other consumables
may degrade the system performance.
1 Remove the bent or damaged sample probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the bent or damaged sample probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.
2 Install a new sample probe.
CAUTION
After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to sample disk installation.
8.9.4 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe

When too much water exists in sample probe wash well and cannot be drained, the
wash well might have been clogged. You should follow this procedure to clean the
wash well.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD

3 Add alkaline wash solution, javel water with 0.5% active chlorine. or 84
disinfectant (1ml) to the wash well and soak it for 10 minutes.

4 Place the Power to ON.
6 Execute “System Reset” on the Daily Maint. page. The system will reset
and rinse the sample probe and wash well automatically with deionized
water. Check if the sample probe wash well drains liquid normally.
8.9.5 Replacing R1/R2 Probes

If the reagent probe is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it
immediately.
WARNING
probe.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
1 Remove the bent or damaged probe.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the bent or damaged reagent probe in accordance
with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste
disposal.
2 Install a new reagent probe.
CAUTION
After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate it to a
position above the wash well prior to reagent disk installation.
8.9.6 Replacing Sample/Reagent Mixers

If the mixer is bent or damaged, follow this procedure to replace it immediately.

WARNING
When replacing, pinch the mixer only by its knurled part. Protect the
flat part of the mixer from scratches.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the damaged mixer in accordance with your local or
CAUTION

2 Prepare a new mixer. Wash the flat part of the new mixer with wash
solution-dipped gauze or cotton swabs and then wipe it with DI
water-dipped gauze.
3 Gently pull the mixer to its highest point and rotate it to a position
4
CAUTION
When trying to pull out the mixer, concentrate your force in
the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased force may
damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and unscrew counter-clockwise the
retaining nut until the mixer looses. Pull the mixer downward to remove it
and remove the nut.

5 Align the new mixer to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently screw
it into the nut until the end of the mixer is in line with the smaller hole of the
nut.
6 Pinch the mixer by the knurled part and align the nut hole to the axis of the
mixer and push the nut onto the mixer until it reaches the end of the mixer.
Tighten the nut by screwing it clockwise.
CAUTION
When trying to push the mixer into the arm, concentrate your
force in the direction of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased
force may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Ensure the mixer is all the way pushed to the end.
7 After replacing the bar, visually check whether the mixer is vertical to the
bar arm.
If not, return to step 5 to remove the mixer and reinstall it.
8 Pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position above
its wash well.
CAUTION
After installing the mixer, be sure to rotate it to a position
above its wash well.
the mixers automatically.
8.9.7 Replacing Syringe Plunger Assembly

The plungers of sample and reagent syringes may be worn out after a certain period
of service. A worn-out plunger may lead to leakage, which will consequently result in
inaccurate aspiration and unreliable test results. You should check the syringes
everyday and replace the old plunger assembly with a new one when,
The old one has served for 6 months; or

The old one has been used for over 100,000 tests; or
The old one is apparently damaged.

WARNING
CAUTION
Exercise caution when installing the plunger assembly. Excessive force
may crack the syringe.
Always wear gloves while replacing the syringe plunger assembly.
Plunger assembly of sample syringe can be replaced in the same way as that of
reagent syringe. Perform the following steps to replace the reagent syringe plunger
assembly.

2 Open the front doors of the analyzer. You will see the sample syringe on the
right and two reagent syringes on the left.
3 Prepare a new plunger assembly as shown in the figure below. Soak the
plunger tip in deionized water to eliminate bubbles.
Plunger Tip Plunger Rod Plunger Button

Plunger Guide Cap
4 Unscrew counter-clockwise the four upper retaining screws of the syringe,
then remove the screws and space bar.
5 Unscrew counter-clockwise the lower retaining screw of the syringe, then
remove the syringe from the holder.
6
CAUTION
There may be residual water in the syringe connector. Do not
drop water onto the analyzing unit during operation.
Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand and unscrew counter-clockwise the syringe. Exercise caution so that
the gasket on the syringe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a clean
place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been disassembled for
2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling precision be
affected.

7
CAUTION
There may be residual water in the syringe. Do not drop
water onto the analyzing unit during operation.
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution
when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Unscrew counter-clockwise the plunger guide cap, pinch the plunger button
and gently pull the plunger assembly from the syringe.
8
CAUTION
The plunger rod of the syringe is slender. Exercise caution when
working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Pinch the new plunger assembly by the plunger button and carefully insert
the plunger tip into the syringe and push it all the way to the end. Screw
clockwise the plunger guide cap until secure.
9 Immerse the syringe connector into deionized water. Pinch the plunger
button, pull it to aspirate half syringe of deionized water and then push it to
expel the deionized water and the air from the syringe.
10 Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other
hand. Screw clockwise the syringe into the T-piece until secure.
11 Place the syringe on the holder.
12 Install the space bar and four upper retaining screws. Do not tighten the
screws now.
13 Align the plunger button to the lower retaining screw of the plunger and
screw clockwise the screw until secure.
14 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe.
15 Tighten the four upper retaining screws.
16 Place the Power to ON. Wait for about 30 seconds, then execute System
Prime on the Daily Maint. page. Repeat the instruction for several times if
necessary, and check if the T-piece is leaking.
If not, go to the next step.
If yes, tighten the syringe. If leakage remains, replace the connector and
T-piece.
8.9.8 Removing Air Bubbles

When you see air bubbles in the syringe, follow this procedure to remove them.

BIOHAZARD
protective clothing when doing the maintenance.
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national

2 Loosen the screws on the syringe cover and remove the cover. You can
see the two reagent syringes on the left and sample syringe on the right.
3 Loosen the four upper retaining screws of the syringe, then remove the
screws and space bar.
4 Loosen the four lower retaining screws of the syringe and remove the
syringe from the holder.
5 Pull the plunger gently outwards until you can not proceed any more, and
then push it quickly. Repeat this pull-push operation until the air bubbles
are removed from the syringe.
CAUTION
Be sure not to push the plunger to the end tip; otherwise the
syringe may be damaged.
6 Place the syringe on the holder. Install the space bars and tighten the
upper retaining screws.
NOTE
th
The upper edge of the upper space bar must reach the 7 scale
on the syringe.
When fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them
alternately with equilibrium force.
7 Tighten counterclockwise the lower retaining screw until secure.
8.9.9 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

After the Cuvette/Lamp Check instruction is performed, if a cuvette is found to be
damaged, write down the cuvette number and follow this procedure to replace the
cuvette.
WARNING
Before replacing cuvette rotate the probes to a position convenient for
operation.

BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the damaged cuvette in accordance with your local or
CAUTION
1 Place the Power to OFF

replacement and then remove the reaction disk cover.
3 Use a hex wrench to loosen the three screws that fix the reaction disk.
4 Unplug the heater connector from the reaction disk.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when unplugging connectors so that the
leads and connectors will not be damaged.

5 Hold the reaction disk and remove it from the chamber.
6 Use your hand or tweezers to take out the damaged cuvette and then install
a new cuvette.
CAUTION
The damaged cuvette may be fixed tightly. Use tweezers to
remove the cuvette if necessary. While taking out the cuvette
using a pair of tweezers, pinch the two sides of the cuvette
simultaneously. Pinching one side of the cuvette will break the
cuvette.
Do not touch the light entrance of the new reaction cuvette, or
accurate measurement may not be achieved.
Be sure to secure the retaining spring when installing the
reaction cuvette.
7 Install the reaction disk and make sure the three screws on the reaction disk
are tightened.
8 Place the Power to ON.
9 On the Daily Maint. page, execute the Cuvette/Lamp Check instruction
and view the execution result.
If the new cuvette is still identified as damaged, check the lamp and lens,
wipe the front lens assembly with water-free ethanol and replace the lamp
and fiber if necessary.

8.9.10 Washing Glass cuvette (Optional)
After executing the Cuvette/Lamp Check in Utilities- Daily Maint., wash the
cuvettes which do not meet the requirement. Please refer to 8.7.9 for details.
8.9.11 Adjust Pressure

During start-up initialization or wake-up initialization, if alarm happens, enter the the
Utilities-Daily Maint. screen and select the Adjust Pressure, then click Execute button.
You can check the pressure value and vacuum value in the following screen.
Adjust the 25psi pressure through adjusting the safety valve; adjust the 10psi regulating
valve and 5psi regulating valve to adjust the pressure value of 10psi and 5psi.
The adjustment of safety valve:
When the 25psi pressure exceeds the alarm limit of 20-30psi, it can be restored to around
25psi by adjust the safety valve. The adjustment method is as follows:
1. Pull the safety valve knob out. Operate after unlock the knob;
2. Adjust the knob until the specified pressure reaches around 25psi. Rotating to the L
direction to decrease the pressure and rotating to the H direction to increase the
pressure.
3. When the target pressure is reached, pull the knob inside to lock it , avoiding pressure
fluctuation.
Precaution on the safety valve operation:
1. Before adjusting the pressure, be sure to pull the knob out to unlock it, otherwise the
rotating might damage the knob.
2. When you rotate the knob to the L direction until the extreme is reached, the knob will
be locked and can not be restored. So, take extra care to observe the 25 psi pressure
value.

8.9.12 Replacing Check Valve
1 Place the MAIN POWER to OFF
2 Open the drawer and locate the following check valves.

Under the drying module-air filter-tubing label 195. The check valve is between the
tubing 197 and 198.

3 After replacing the new filter, reconnect the tubings. If you discover the end of the
tubing is distorted, use sccissors to cut a small part of the tubing and then
reconnect the tubings to ensure good connection.
NOTE:
While replacing the check valves, pay attion to their
directions.
The flow direction of the liquid in the check valve is shown in the following figure.
4 Check the conncection of the tubings and whether leakage happens at the
adapters.
8.10 Maintaining ISE Module(Optional)

BIOHAZARD:
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Generally after the replacement of any of the following components,
several ISE calibrations should be run before ISE Unit become stable.
8.10.1 Replacing Reagent Pack

1 Place the POWER to OFF.
2 Open the ISE unit door.
3 Remove and install a new reagent module.
5 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list. Enter “25” in the edit
boxes next to Purge A and Purge B in Parameters area, then select
Execute to start the purge cycle.

6 Execute Purge A Cycle and Purge B Cycle and check whether the
initialization of the Reagent Pack is finished. If no error occurs during the
process, the Reagent Pack is replaced successfully.
8.10.2 Replacing Electrodes
WARNING:
Before performing the replacement, make sure the analyzer is
powered off.
If you run no more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:
Na+ Electrode 6 months

K+ Electrode 6 months
Cl- Electrode 6 months
Reference Electrode 6 months
If you run more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the
electrodes according to the following recommended schedule:
Na+ Electrode 10,000 samples

K+ Electrode 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode 10,000 samples
Reference Electrode 10,000 samples
NOTE:
Because the electrodes must be installed sequentially, you
have to take out the electrode to be replaced and those (or
that) over it from above to below.

2 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
The Confirm dialog box pops up. Select OK to start maintaining the ISE
module.
3 Replace the electrodes.
4 Execute Purge A Cycle. If no error occurs during the process, it means the
electrode is replaced successfully.
8.10.3 Replacing Tubing

This maintenance operation must be performed by service personnel.

8.10.4 ISE Unit Storage (optional)
BIOHAZARD:
CAUTION:
The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit
(optional) is connected.
The ISE unit (optional) should be on power all the time. In some cases
that the POWER will be shut down for a long time more than half an
hour, the following steps should be performed.

2 Select Clean Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
3 Pull out the joint A and joint B of the wand tubing which has been inserted
into the adapters of the pump tubing. Hold them on for a few seconds until
the solution in the wand tubing flows back to Reagent Pack.
4 Select Purge Combination from the Instructions list, and enter digit “25”
in the edit boxes to the right of Purge A and Purge B. Select Execute to
start the purge cycle based on the parameters you have entered.
5 Select Maintenance Cycle from the Instructions list and select Execute.
6 Remove the electrodes.
7 Remove the Reagent Pack.
8 Put the reference, Na+, Cl- and spacer electrodes into their individual
sealed bags.
9 Aspirate a small amount of Calibrant A from the port of the reagent module
with a syringe and inject it into the lumens of the K+ electrode(and Li+
electrode) until the lumens are full.
Cover both ends of the lumens with tapes to prevent the Calibrant A flows
from the lumens.
Put the K+ electrode into their individual sealed bags.

NOTE:
The tube adapters on Reagent Pack should be covered by the red
caps. Store the Reagent Pack properly.

9 Test and Maintenance
Software
9.1 Basic Operations

9.1.1 Logging On
The system Test and Maintenance Software applies to the following users:
Debug user: Development engineers of Mindray

Production user: Production personnel of Mindray.
Maintenance user: Service engineers and users.
9.1.2 Overview
9.1.2.1 Screen Layout

The main screen of the test and maintenance software consists of two parts. See
Figure 9-1.
9 Test and Maintenance Software 9-1

Figure 9-1 Screen layout of system Test and Maintenance Software
The upper area provides various function buttons to test each unit.
The lower area displays the communication data associated with the main
unit/subunits. Different colors indicate different types of data frames. The lower-right
area provides options and buttons to control the communication frame.
9.1.2.2 Function Distribution

The basic operation commands of main unit/subunits are included in the tab of
corresponding unit, which also includes other functions like serial port setup, version
query, dark current test, sending instruction, etc.
9.1.2.3 Data Storage

The system saves under the startup directory all data of each unit produced since the
current startup. The data includes:
CleanWaterTempData.txt: Temperature of wash solution.
ISE.txt: Test records of ISE unit.
pressure.txt: Pressure test data.
ReacTempData.txt: Reaction disk temperature.
Disp.txt: All data frames that comply with the communication protocol.
recv.txt: All data that reach the serial port.
Additionally, a Save button is provided on the working page of some units.
9-2 9 Test and Maintenance Software

9.1.3 Operating Commands
9.1.3.1 Main Unit

On the Main Unit screen includes the following commands:
Shakehand: Select this command to shake hand with the main unit.
Download Parameters: Reserved.
Enable modify parameters: Select this command to enable modifying the

parameters of all units.
Disable modify parameters: Select this command to disable modifying the

parameters of all units.
Mechanical reset: Select this command to reset the mechanical parts of

subunits.
System reset: Select this command to reset the subunits of the analyzer.
Serial Port Setup: Set up serial port information. COM1-6 is supported.
Unit Version: Select this command to view the versions of main unit and
subunits.
Dark Current: Select this command to inquire the dark current at each
wavelength after 2 minutes the lamp is turned off. Dark current check is often
required before the photoelectric unit and basic performance are tested.
Send instruction: Enter an instruction and select this command to send it.
Please note that this function can be performed only by debug users.
System prime: Select this command to prime the water tank. The system will
stop automatically once the water tank is full.
Sleep: Select this command to make the main unit enter sleep status.
Wake up: Select this command to wake up the main unit.
Search Log: Select this command to view the event logs of the main unit.
9.1.3.2 Probe and Mixer Units

The probes and mixers can be debugged easily. This section introduces the
confusing commands of the two types of units.
Positions of the probes and mixers:
To top of …: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the top of …
To vertical home position: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to its
vertical home position.
To ver. Limit of…: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to its lowest
vertical position.
Into…: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the fixed position of …
To liquid of …: Select this command to move the probe/mixer to the liquid level
of … or to the lowest vertical position in case of no liquid.

…for steps: Select this command to move the probe/mixer for configured steps,
which are related to the parameter configuration of the unit.
Syringe empty: Select this command to move the syringe to the home position.
Syringe reset: Select this command to move the syringe to the zero position and
then to the home position.
Syringe full: Select this command to move the syringe to the obverse limit
position.
9.1.3.3 Reagent Disk Unit

Shakehand: Select this command to shake hand with the reagent disk unit.(This
command is similar to that of other units.)
Reset reagent disk: Select this command to reset the reagent disk unit.(This
command is similar to that of other units.)
Rotate to given position: Select this command to rotate the reagent disk at
specified speed for given circles and then stop it on specified position.
Find zero position: Select this option to rotate the reagent disk to the zero
position and then rotate it at specified speed for given circles and then stop it on
specified position.
Rotate obversely: Select this option to rotate the reagent disk clockwise.
Rotate for given positions: This command is similar to “Rotate to given position”
except that the reagent disk rotates for given positions and then stops.
9.1.3.4 Sample Disk Unit

Indicator Control: The indicator may appear in three status, which include On, Flash
and Off.
Other commands of the sample disk unit are similar to that of the reagent disk unit.
9.1.3.5 Reaction Disk Unit

Rotate for given positions: Select this command to rotate the reaction disk
clockwise for given steps. The rotating distance is related to the parameter
configuration of the reaction disk unit.
Rotate and measure: Select this command to rotate the reaction disk at highest
speed for one circle and then stop it on position 2. During the rotating, photometric
measurement is performed.
Adjust lamp: Select this command to adjust the brightness level(0-255) of the lamp.
The two commands “Rotate to given position” and “Rotate for given positions”
are similar to that of the reagent disk unit.
9.1.3.6 Fluidic Unit

The Fluidic Unit tab provides commands that enable you to debug the wash unit,
control the valves and pumps, and inquire/view the current status of all fluidic tanks.
Note: To control the valves in batch, you must:
Understand completely the relationship among all valves and their functions.

Ensure the probes and mixers influenced by current operation are stopped in
their wash wells.
9.1.3.7 Fluidic Pressure Curve

Figure 9-2 Fluidic Pressure Curve screen
On the Fluidic Pressure Curve tab shows the readings of the four pressure gauges.
When all readings cannot be displayed on one screen, they will be shown circularly.
Interval: Set up the interval to take pressure readings.
Range: Set up the Y-coordinate range of the curve.
Start: Start receiving the pressure data and display it. You can control the pressure
data collecting process by using Pause, Resume and Stop.
Save/Load: Save and review the pressure readings.
9.1.3.8 ISE Unit

This section introduces the screen operations of the ISE Unit tab. For test method of
the ISE unit, refer to ISE Test Techniques. The ISE Unit screen consists of four parts:
Step Instructions, Loop Command, Manual Instructions and Debugging. See
Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 ISE Unit tab

Step Instructions
Click any command in this area. The corresponding operation will be performed.
Manually Instruction
Multiple buttons in this area should be used during a complete test. The following
operation combinations are available:
Select Pump calib.<PMCL>+Start<START> to test the pumps.

Select Wash<CLEAN>+Start<START> to perform cleaning.
Select Serum<SAMP>+Start<START> to perform serum test.
Select Urine1<UWBW>+Urine2<UWBW>+Start<START> to perform urine test.
Loop Command
The commands in this area can be performed circularly. On the left is the circular
command control area and on the right is the instruction area.
Note: Since the ISE module is external, a false result will be returned immediately
after an instruction is sent to it, and the true result will be returned after a period.
However, the software will start the next cycle once receiving a result. Therefore,
“Interval” should be set up carefully.
Debugging
The commands provided in this area are used to debug the ISE unit and can be
operated in the same way as the Step Instructions.
Figure 9-4 Debugging

9.1.3.9 Bar Code Unit
Figure 9-5 Bar Code Unit
This section introduces the screen operations of the Bar Code tab.
Debugging bar code reader
1. Select a bar code type: Sample Bar Code or Reagent Bar Code.
2. Select Initialize to initialize the corresponding bar code reader.
3. Select Laser on or Laser off to align the bar code reader.
Scanning test
1. Select a scan mode, which includes Dynamic, Dynamic and Static, and Static.
2. Set up the start position, interval and cycles for scanning.
3. Select Scan to start scanning.
During scanning, you can select Pause, Resume or Stop to control the
operation.
Judge the scanning result.
All instructions that are sent or received are displayed in the box on
right-hand side of the screen. You can save or clear the instructions if
needed.
Testing scanning stability
This operation is similar to the scanning test except that the options like scan mode
and start position must not be configured.
Sending instructions
Enter the original command and select Send Instruction to send it directly.

9.1.3.10 Reaction Disk Temperature
Figure 9-6 Reaction Disk Temp. screen
This chapter introduces the functions of the Reaction Disk Temp. screen.
Inquiring power of reaction disk heater and temperature of sensor
1. Set up the times of taking temperature and power readings and the interval
between two readings.

2. Set up the Y-coordinate range for displaying temperature curve.
3. Select Start to start taking the temperature and power readings. During the
reading process,
You can stop or pause the taking operation, and then save and load history
readings.
You can adjust dynamically the Y-coordinate range of the temperature
curve.
You can zoom in the curve display area as needed.
The temperature data since the current startup are saved in the directory
where the test and maintenance software locates.
Checking sensor parameters and configuring the parameters
Select a sensor in the Correction Data area.
Enter the resistance corresponding to the temperature of each sensor.
Select Calculate to calculate the parameters of the sensor and judgment

whether the sensor is qualified or not.
Select Save to save the sensor parameters.
Inquiring, configuring and adjusting PID parameters
1. Select Current in the PID area to inquiring the PID parameters.
2. Select Save to save the edited PID parameters.
3. Select Self-adjust to notify the corresponding subunit to start adjusting the PID
parameters.
Testing heater control
Select Heater on or Heater off. If the command is not executed correctly, select it
again.
9.1.3.11 Wash Solution Temperature

The Wash Solution Temp. is similar to the Reaction Disk Temp. screen and can be
operated in the same way. See 9.1.3.10 Reaction Disk Temperature for details.
9.1.3.12 Photoelectric Unit

The Photoelectric Unit screen provides a function that enables you to perform the
following three tests for photometric measurement:
Measuring specified cuvette while the reaction disk is rotating
1. Select the check box next to Reaction disk rotates and deselect Measure 90
cuvettes.
2. Set up the cuvette position to measure, times and interval for collecting data.
3. Select Start. The AD values at each wavelength for the cuvette are displayed in
tabular and graphic forms.
Measuring specified cuvette in Stop status
1. Deselect the check boxes next to Reaction disk rotates and Measure 90
cuvettes.

3. Set up the rotating steps.
4. Select Start. The AD values at each wavelength for the cuvette are displayed in
tabular and graphic forms.
NOTE
After executing this command, you must reset the photoelectric unit
mechanically.
Measuring all 90 cuvettes
1. Select the check box next to Measure 90 cuvettes.
3. Select Start. All AD values at each wavelength for the 90 cuvettes are displayed
in tabular form.
9.2 Macro Instructions

9.2.1 Function
Each unit tab of the test and maintenance software only includes the basic
commands and procedures for ordinary alignment, which do not support more
complex or general test. However, the Macro Instruction tab allows you to create
necessary instructions or instruction set (macroinstruction).
9.2.2 Detailed Operations
9.2.2.1 Screen Layout

On the right side of the screen is the Macro Instruction area, in which you can
create and edit macro instructions and execute them circularly.
On the left side of the screen is the Instruction area, in which you can view the
detailed instructions of specified unit. See Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 Macro Instruction screen
9.2.2.2 Setting up Macro Instruction Name

1. Select a debug type from the drop-down list box next to Type in the Macro
Instruction area.
2. Select New.
3. Enter the name of the new macro instruction in the popup dialog box, then select
OK. The name appears in the drop-down list box next to Name.
9.2.2.3 Adding Single Command

1. Select or create a macro instruction name.
2. Select a command.
3. Method: Select desired unit and instruction type in the Instruction area. All
qualified instructions of the unit are displayed in the lower table.
4. Entering instruction values.
5. Enter instruction value in the Value column according to other information in the
table. Note:
The contents in the Instruction and Value columns should correspond to

each other. The Instruction column explains the value in the Value column.
The Description column provides detailed explanation only to the first line
in the Instruction column. The Parameter1 column explains each instruction
of the selected type. You need not to enter the operating information and
parameter for some simple instructions.
The last two lines of the Value column can be left blank.
The Value column for the Reserved instructions can be left blank.
6. Verify the instructions.
After setting up an instruction that can be executed in current system

environment, you can verify if it can function correctly by clicking Send. If yes,

correct response and result frames will be displayed, and even data frame will
be uploaded for some instructions. If not, the information box at the bottom of
the screen will indicate the error in red.
7. Add a command to the macro instruction.
Select Add to Macro. The selected command is added to the macro instruction
list on the right-hand side of the screen. Repeat steps 1) through 5) to add more
commands.
8. Select Save below the macro instruction list to save the macro instruction. The
newly-created macro instruction is temporarily stored in the memory. If not
saved, the macro instruction will disappear when you switch to other one or exit
the system.
9.2.2.4 Modifying Macro Instruction

1. Select a macro instruction name.
Select an instruction type and a specific macro instruction in the Macro

Instruction area. All single commands of the instruction are displayed in the
lower list.
2. Select desired command that you want to modify.
Select a command. The table in middle of the screen shows the detailed
information of the command.
3. Modify the macro instruction.
Change the Value of each byte, or reselect a unit name and instruction type to
replace the instruction of the selected No. in the macro instruction list.
4. Save the macro instruction. Select Save to save the macro instruction to the
database.
9.2.2.5 Run a Macro Instruction

If each single command of desired macro instruction can be executed circularly, you
can set the cycle times to a number greater than 1. You can also pause or stop the
executing process by selecting Pause or Stop.
9.2.2.6 Special Use

The Macro Instruction tab also provides a feature that enables certain byte of a
single command to be changed regularly during circular execution of the macro
instruction. Follow this procedure to define the type of a single command:
1) Select desired command that you want to define.
2) Enter the No. of the desired byte of the command in the Instruction Details
area.
3) Enter the delay time in the Delay field, which can be neglected if no delay is
needed before the command is executed.
4) Enter other parameters like low limit, high limit and step. In case the macro
instruction is cycled for many times, when the command is executed, the
corresponding byte of the selected No. will be increased according to the
defined low limit and step until the high limit, then the byte of the low limit (No.)

starts running again.
NOTE
The delay information and byte control information can exist
simultaneously or by themselves.
9.3 Performance
Most performance tests will ask you to configure a start cuvette position. However,
the cuvette on the start position you have selected may contaminate the wipe block;
therefore the system will record the cuvettes which have experienced performance
tests. When running the first performance tests since started up, the system will ask
you to select a cuvette for the performance test and then record the cuvette, which
will no longer be used for the following tests.
9.3.1 Accuracy and Repeatability of Absorbance
9.3.1.1 Introduction
Accuracy means the consistency of the measured absorbance of solution on
chemistry analyzer with the standard value.
Repeatability means the precision among several absorbance values of a solution

measured repeatedly.
9.3.1.2 Operating Procedures and Screen Explanation

Figure 9-8 Performance Screen
1) Prepare N groups of reagents for test.
2) Select a sampling type.

Auto differs from Manual on the sampling method. With Manual sampling, you
should, during testing, add N(reagent groups) groups of reagents manually for
N(times for each group) times.
3) Set up the start reagent position and start cuvette.
Start reagent position is not required when Manual is selected for sampling.
4) Set up the reagent groups and sampling times for each group.
Number of reagent groups should be within 1-6, and the product of group number and
sampling times should be no greater than 90.
5) Set up the reagent volume. This option is not required when Manual is selected
for sampling.
6) Set up the primary and secondary wavelength for each reagent group. Up to 6
groups of wavelength are allowed.
7) Set up the start period for testing.
Start Period means the period from which photometric measurement should be
performed since reagent is dispensed. In case of Manual sampling, the photometric
measurement is performed immediately after reagent is dispensed.
8) Select Start to start testing.
Once testing is started, the system first washes N(number of reagent groups *
sampling times for each group) cuvettes and then dispense reagents for each of them.
In Manual sampling mode, the system will remind you to dispense reagent
successively. In the start period, the system starts measuring each reaction cuvette
and takes the absorbance value of different wavelengths.
9) When photometric measurement is finished, the system calculates the AV, SD

and CV at different wavelengths of each reagent group according to the
absorbance values.
10) Select Save to save the test results in a .txt file.
11) To review history test results, select Load. The results are displayed in the
middle of the screen.
9.3.2 Stability of Absorbance
Stability means the difference between the maximum and minimum absorbance
values of a solution that are obtained from multiple measurements during a long time.

The stability test is similar to the accuracy and repeatability test, except:
N(number of reagent groups) cuvettes are washed during the stability test.
The stability test allows photometric measurement to be performed when the
reaction disk is rotating or stopped.
When reagent is dispensed during stability test, the system will remind user to
add paraffin.

9.3.2.3 Summary
The stability of absorbance should comply with the corresponding requirements, that
is, be no greater than 100.
9.3.3 Linearity of Absorbance
Linearity test is used to measure the linearity range of the absorbance.

The linearity test is similar to the accuracy and repeatability test, except:
During the linearity test, all reagents are measured for only one wavelength.
In linearity test different items are calculated, such as blank correction,
theoretical value, etc.
9.3.3.3 Summary
The absorbance range with relative deviation less than ±5％ is the linearity range.
9.3.4 Absorbance Accuracy and Precision of Diluted

Sample
This test is used to determine the accuracy and precision of absorbance of diluted
samples.

1. Prepare samples and diluent. If you want to compare the automatically-diluted
sample with that diluted manually, be sure to prepare manually-diluted solution.
2. Set up the sample position and sample volume.
3. Set up the dilution ration and diluent position(D. Pos).
4. In case of Manual dilute, you should set up the reagent position for manual
dilution(Diluted Pos.).
5. Select Start to start the auto dilute test.
The system first washes N(replicates) reaction cuvettes, then the reagent
probe dispenses diluent and the sample probe dispenses sample. In the
defined start period, the system starts photometric measurement and takes
the absorbance readings.
If Manual dilute is selected, the system starts measuring the absorbance of
manually-diluted sample once auto diluted sample is analyzed. The system
again washes N(replicates) reaction cuvettes, then the reagent probe
dispenses manually-diluted solution. In the defined start period, the system
starts photometric measurement and takes the absorbance readings of the
solution.

When all measurements are finished, the system displays all absorbance
values of the auto-/manually-diluted solution, and calculates the accuracy
and precision of absorbance for auto-diluted sample.
9.3.5 Residue of Cuvette
This test is used to determine the amount of remained water in cuvette that is washed
automatically.

1. Prepare a solution for test.
2. Set up the options on the Residue of cuvette screen in the same way as the
above-mentioned tests.
3. Select Start. The system first measures the absorbance of the solution, and
washes the used cuvette, and then measure again the absorbance of the
solution.
For Auto sampling, the solution will be added automatically.

For Manual sampling, you should add the solution manually.
9.3.6 Sampling Accuracy and Precision of Sample Probe
Sampling accuracy means the deviation between the dispensed volume by
probe(reagent probe/sample probe) and the specified volume. Sampling precision
means the deviation among multiple dispensing volumes by a probe.
9.3.7 Carryover of Sample Probe
This test is to determine in which degree the sample on outside of the sample probe
may contaminate the next sample.

1. Prepare two types of solution for test.
2. Set up the Void Times. Void Times means the number of times that the sample
probe aspirates nothing among the two types of solution.
3. Select Start. The system will remind you to add the two types of solution, and
then measure the absorbance of the solution after the sample probe aspirates
nothing for specified N(Void Times) times.

9.3.8 Backwater
This test is to determine how much water remains on outside of the probes and
mixers that have been washed automatically.
9.3.8.2 Operation
1. Prepare a solution for test.
2. Set up the Void Times, which means the times that the probe/mixer aspirates
nothing in each reaction cuvette.
3. Select a probe or mixer.
4. Select a dilution mode.
Continuous Dilute: The probe or mixer continues with next void aspirating and
cleaning after the previous one.
Dilute<->Reaction disk rotates: An instruction is executed between two void

aspirating.
9.3.9 Stability and Drift of Absorbance
On the Stability/Drift screen absorbance range and drift can be calculated by reading
an existing photoelectric data file, and the system shows the test results for each
cuvette and enables you to learn whether the results are within specified range or not.

1. Run a test for 90 replicates on the operation software, and then copy the folder
(named by the current date) of CURVEDATA that includes 90 .CDT files to the
CURVEDATA folder of the test and maintenance software.
2. Log in the test and maintenance software; select the Performance tab; select
Stability/Drift; enter the sample ID, test No. and test date in the following fields.
3. Select the Load button. If the test data of the specified date is loaded successfully,
a prompt will pop up to indicate the successful loading.
If the test data is lost, you will be prompted to check for 90 complete test data.
4. Enter the period range to calculate the absorbance difference during maximum
reaction time.

5. Select the Calculate button .When the calculation is finished, you will see a couple
of EXCEL files in the directory of the test and maintenance software. These
EXCEL files records various data of each cuvette, such as absorbance,
photoelectric data, absorbance drift, etc. All of the EXCEL files are named in the
format of “year+month+day+hour+minute+second+sample ID+test No.”.
6. Enter the judging criteria in the fields as shown below.
7. Select the Result button. The list on the left side of the screen will show the
cuvettes that do not meet the criteria.
8. Select the View Graph button to review the reaction curves associated with the
test data.

The curve graph at the top left corner indicates the absorbance difference within
maximum reaction time at 340nm; the curve graph at the top right corner indicates
the absorbance difference between the primary and secondary wavelength within
maximum reaction time; the curve graph at the bottom indicates the absorbance drift.
9.4 Parameter
Select the Parameter from the main screen. The Parameter screen is displayed. You
can inquire and configure the parameters of the main unit and subunits. For the
probe/disk/mixer units you are allowed to set up the motor speeds. See the figure
below.
Figure 9-9 Parameter screen
9.4.1 Detailed Operations

Inquire
1. Select a target unit. To inquire parameters of a unit, select one from the
drop-down list box next to Unit. To inquire parameters of a motor, select one
from the drop-down list box next to Motion. Repeat step 1 for the following
operations.(Note: If you select both a unit and a motor, the system will identify
the lastly-selected one.)
2. Select Inquire.
Configure/Configure All
1. Inquire or read the parameters of selected unit/motor.
2. Modify the parameter value.
3. Select Config. To configure the parameter of the modified line, or select Config.
All to configure all parameters of the selected unit/motor.
Save
1. Inquire or read the parameters of selected unit/motor.

2. Select Save to save the parameters.
Read
1. Select a target unit.
2. Select Read, then select a parameter file in the popup dialog box. If you select a
parameter file of a unit other than the target one, the latter will be replaced by
the unit specified in the parameter file.
Default
This button is similar to Save, except that when selecting Default you must not select
a target file, and the parameters will be saved in the directory where the test and
maintenance software locates.
Restore
This button is similar to Read, except that when selecting Restore you must not
select a target file, and the system will read the target file from the directory where the
test and maintenance software locates.

10 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides the system warning messages and recommended corrective
actions, which should be taken in time once any error occurs.
When an error or failure occurs, relevant alarm message will be displayed, and the
system will take corresponding actions.
The alarm message will be displayed in the alarm message area of the software
screen, and then recorded in the system log automatically.
The logs will record the time, level, code and detailed information of each warning to
help user record and search errors.
In case of a warning message, check its error code on the Logs screen of the
operating software, and find recommended actions in the Solution field.
10.1 Classification of Error Messages

On the system, the error messages are divided into different types according to their
severity.
Severity: Warning
Level Description Actions taken by the system

0 Errors to warn user The system will warn the user of the errors like
calibration calculation failure. However, the
system running and test result will not be
affected.
Severity: Invalidating tests
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
1 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate the current test, and
tests run it again if configured. If the error occurs for
consecutive 2 times on the same test, the
system will not rerun such test.
2 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests in current
reagent batch that use the exact reagent.
3 Errors to invalidate The system will invalidate all tests of the
sample sample.
18 Errors to invalidate a When failure (such as sample collision) occurs
instruction during measurement, the system will
invalidate all tests associated with the current
instruction and rerun the tests.
Severity: Pausing

4 Errors to pause R1 The system will stop the sampling of R1 for
probe remaining tests and pause after finishing the
tests whose R1 has been dispensed.
5 Errors to pause R2 The system will stop the sampling of R2 for
probe remaining tests and pause after finishing the
tests whose R2 has been dispensed.
6 Errors to pause sample The system will invalidate all in-progress tests
probe whose sample is not dispensed and forbid
new tests. When other tests whose sampling
is done are finished, the system will pause and
wait for servicing.
7 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing R1 without
reagent disk influencing sampling and other operations.
The system will continue the tests whose
reagent and sample is dispensed or whose
sample is not dispensed and invalidate other
tests. When the valid tests are finished, the
system will pause.
8 Errors to pause sample The system will invalidate the tests whose
mixer sample is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the system
will pause.
9 Errors to pause The system will invalidate the tests whose
reagent mixer reagent is not stirred and forbid new tests.
When the valid tests are finished, the system
will pause.
10 Errors to pause The system will stop dispensing R1 and
washing washing reaction cuvettes. When all valid tests
are finished, the system will pause.
Severity: Stopping analysis

11 Errors to stop analysis The system will invalidate all unfinished tests
10-2 10 Troubleshooting
in emergency and pause.
12 Errors to forbid test When test conditions are not met at system
startup, analysis will be forbidden.
Severity: Forbidding

13 Errors to forbid LIS The system will invalidate sending results to
and downloading sample from the LIS host
and should be connected to LIS again.
14 Errors to forbid ISE When the ISE module is configured but cannot
work normally, the system will forbid running
ISE analytes.
15 Errors to forbid sample When the sample bar code reader is
bar code reader configured but cannot work normally, the
system will forbid scanning samples.
16 Errors to forbid reagent When the reagent bar code reader is
bar code reader configured but cannot work normally, the
system will forbid scanning reagents.
17 Errors to forbid fluidic The system will prohibit the washing function.
system
Severity: Shutting down

19 Errors to exit When startup check is not passed, the system
will remind user of exiting the operating
software.
10.2 Corrective Measures

When an error occurs, check the error code on the Logs page of the Utilities screen
and then find corresponding measures in the following tables.
WARNING
When troubleshooting the analyzer, first find out whether it is necessary
to switch off the Main Power or Analyzing Unit Power.
BIOHAZARD
10.2.1 Failures of Operation Unit
10.2.1.1 Operating System

Error Level Error Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Message
C0001 19 Reinstall Windows
Operating Operating system is not XP or Windows 2000
system error Windows XP/2000 and the operating
software
C0002 19 Install a memory
Insufficient Memory is less than
above 128M and
memory 128M
reboot
C0003 19 Resolution Screen resolution is not Set resolution to
error 1024*768 1024*768
C0004 19 Set color to 65535
Color error Color is below 16 bits
and reboot
C0005 0 Rearrange hard disk.
Insufficient Remaining disk space is
Delete curves and
disk space less than 1G
other unuseful files
C0006 19 Rearrange hard disk.
Out of disk Remaining disk space is
Delete curves and
space less than 200M
other unuseful files
C0007 19 CPU
CPU is below Celeron
performance Replace PC or CPU
733
low
C0008 0 Check printer
Printer is not powered connection. Check if
Printer
on. Cable is not printer is powered
cannot be
connected. No driver is on, driver and default
connected
installed printer has been
installed
C0009 0 Check for paper jam.
Printer Paper jam. No paper. Check if printer is
failure No ink busy, and print tasks
are too many
C0010 0 Help No help document. Help Check if help
document document is damaged. document exists or is
error No memory space damaged
C0011 0 No sound card is
Sound card installed. Sound card Reinstall sound card
failure failure. Incorrect sound or sound card driver
card driver
10.2.1.2 Equipment Connection

Code Message
C0101 12 Equipment Serial cable is not Check serial port
cannot be connected. Analyzing connection. Replug
connected Unit Switch is cable. Check if
Code Message
powered off analyzing unit is
powered on. Start
initialization again.
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
C0102 12 Check serial port
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Sending buffer is full.
analyzing unit is
cannot send Serial port is not
powered on. Start
instruction initialized
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
C0103 12 Check serial port
connection. Replug
cable. Check if
Serial port Receiving buffer is
analyzing unit is
cannot full. Serial port is not
powered on. Start
receive data initialized
Restart PC and
analyzing unit
10.2.1.3 Calculation
Code Message
C0301 0 (%s Reagent blank
Replace reagent.
test)Calibratio absorbance is too
Replace calibrator.
n sensitivity high. Calibrator is
Recalibrate
error degenerated
C0302 0 (%s
test)Coefficien Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
t difference wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
limit is out of wrong Recalibrate
range
C0303 0 (%s
test)Correlatio
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
n
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
coefficient(R2
wrong Recalibrate
) is out of
range
C0304 0 (%s
Calibrator goes Replace reagent.
test)Reaction
wrong. Reagent goes Replace calibrator.
curve SD is
wrong Recalibrate
out of range
C0305 0 (%s Results cannot be
Replace reagent.
test)Calibratio calculated by
Replace calibrator.
n parameters specified rule. Results
Recalibrate or
cannot be are abnormal.
recalculate calibration
calculated by Calibration is not
parameters
given method convergent
Code Message
C0306 0 (%s
Reagent blank
test)Absorban Replace reagent.
absorbance is too
ce of 0 Replace calibrator.
high. Calibrator is
calibrator is Recalibrate
degenerated
out of range
C0307 0 (%s
Calibration replicates
test)Calibratio
are unfinished.
n data is Fill reagent and
Reagent is
incomplete. calibrator. Recalibrate
insufficient. Calibrator
Cannot
is insufficient
calculate
C0308 0 (%s test and
%d Key points are lost
sample)Resp during response Rerun
onse calculate calculation
error
C0309 0 (%s test and Abnormal sample
%d (hemolysis, etc).
Run diluted sample, or
sample)Resp Calibrator
recalibrate
onse is out of concentration is too
range low
C0310 0 If problem occurs
Communication
Received data frequently, reconnect
between analyzing
check sum serial cable. If problem
unit and operation
error remains, contact the
unit is interfered
developer
C0311 0 Control is
(%s
degenerated. Rerun. Replace control
test)Real-time
Reagent goes wrong. or reagent and rerun.
QC 12s
Light intensity is Replace light source
warning
abnormal
C0312 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC of 13s is
out of control
abnormal
C0313 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC of 22s is
out of control
abnormal
C0314 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC R4s is out
of control
abnormal
C0315 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC 41s is out
of control
abnormal
C0316 0 Control is
(%s
test)Real-time
QC 10x is out
of control
abnormal
Code Message
C0317 0 (%s
Calibrator goes
test)Calibratio Replace reagent or
wrong. Reagent goes
n repeatability calibrator. Recalibrate
wrong
is out of range
C0318 0 (%s
Incorrect reagent
test)Multi-poin
dispensing volume. Retest un-monotone
t or nonlinear
Incorrect calibrator points. Recalibrate
calibration is
dispensing volume.
not monotone
C0319 0 (%s)Result Abnormal test result. Rerun participated
cannot be Error occurs like 0 tests. Check and reset
calculated dividend calculation formula
C0320 0 (%d
sample/%s Response error.
test)Concentr Calibration formula Rerun or recalculate
ation cannot error
be calculated
C0321 0 Absorbance is Rerun, or rerun after
Sample goes wrong.
out of linearity replacing reagent or
Reagent goes wrong
range sample
C0322 0 (%s test and Antigen excess. Too
%d much sample.
Dilute and rerun
sample)Prozo Sample concentration
ne check error is too high.
%d
Reagent is stored too Rerun after replacing
sample)R1
long or expired reagent
blank exceeds
limit
%d
sample)No
Rerun, or rerun after
linear interval Unsteady reagent.
replacing reagent or
in Kinetic Sample goes wrong
sample
analysis.
Cannot
calculate
10.2.1.4 Sample Bar Code

Code Message
C0401 0 Released sample is Check sample tube for
Sample
not unloaded. barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s
Barcode label is in Reprint and reapply
already exists
wrong place barcode label
C0402 0 Barcode %s
Sample information Re-download or
has no
does not exist on LIS manually input request
corresponding
or is not downloaded information
request
C0403 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
Code Message
C0404 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
10.2.1.5 Reagent Bar Code

Code Message
C0501 0 Deleted reagent is not
Check reagent bottle for
Reagent unloaded. Barcode
barcode mis-applying.
barcode %s label is in wrong
Reprint and reapply
already exists place. Reagent is
barcode label
used repeatedly
C0502 0 Barcode %s
Reagent barcode is
includes Rescan this reagent
printed in wrong
invalid barcode, or reprint and
format. Barcode scan
reagent rescan as configured
error
information
C0503 0 Rescan. Reprint and
Barcode %s Barcode scan error.
rescan barcode as
check error Bar code print error
configured
C0504 0 Reset barcode format,
%s barcode Barcode is in wrong
or reprint or rescan
error format
barcode
10.2.1.6 LIS Communication

Code Message
C0601 13 Check LIS connection
LIS host Abnormal network and network cable.
cannot be connection. LIS does Check if LIS host and
connected not start LIS station can start
normally
Incorrect accidentally, send or
segment receive again. If
Communication
sequence. problem occurs
failure
Required frequently, consult
segment lost developer of LIS or
equipment
accidentally, send or
receive again. If
Required field Communication
problem occurs
lost failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Code Message
receive again. If
Data type Communication
problem occurs
error failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Field value is Communication
problem occurs
not found failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong Communication
problem occurs
message type failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong event Communication
problem occurs
No. failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong Communication
problem occurs
process ID failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
receive again. If
Wrong version Communication
problem occurs
No. failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Unknown receive again. If
Communication
keyword problem occurs
failure
identity frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Keyword receive again. If
Communication
identity problem occurs
failure
already exists frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
Code Message
receive again. If
Unknown Communication
problem occurs
error failure
frequently, consult
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0613 0 Neglect. If problem
Your query
occurs frequently,
does not exist LIS failure
contact developer of
on LIS
LIS or equipment
C0614 13 Send and receive again
LIS host is
after a moment, or
busy. Cannot LIS failure
reconnect to LIS. Reset
respond
LIS
C0615 0 Check network
connection. If problem
LIS does not start.
LIS response occurs continuously for
Communication
is timed out 3 times, contact
failure
developer of LIS or
equipment
C0616 0 Check if LIS host works
normally. Reset LIS
host. If problem occurs
Application LIS host database
continuously for 3
record locked error
times, contact the LIS
manufacture or
equipment developer
10.2.1.7 Others
Code Message
C0701 2 All reagents in this
kind of bottles do not
Fill reagent of this test,
%s test has reach minimum limit.
or replace it with new
no enough %s All reagents of this
reagent
kind cannot be
detected
C0702 11 Check if equipment is
Analyzing unit is busy
Test period powered on. Restore
and cannot return
timed out. failure. Communicate
result, serial
Cannot with control software.
communication error,
continue Restart analyzing unit
or power failure
and operation unit
C0703 12 Retest dark current on
Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Dark current Excessive circuit
page. Adjust
is too high noise
photoelectric gain.
Contact your developer
C0704 12 Reset the main unit on
Analyzing unit Parameter
reset failed downloading failed
page
Code Message
C0705 11 Restore failure on
Analyzing unit
Sensor failure. page. Restart analyzing
failure cannot
Motor/Belt failure unit and operation unit.
recover
Contact equipment
developer
C0706 0 No floppy disk or U
Storage disk is inserted. Check if U disk or
device error. Insufficient disk floppy disk is inserted or
Cannot export space. Floppy disk or full. Check if storage
data U disk is locked or device is damaged
damaged
C0707 0 No floppy disk or U
disk is inserted. File
Storage Check if U disk or
does not exist. File
device error. floppy disk is inserted or
error. File is
Cannot import full. Check if storage
damaged. Floppy
data device is damaged
disk or U disk is
locked or damaged
C0708 0 Insufficient
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on reagent on specified position of
solution on
disk reagent disk
reagent disk
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
reagent disk position of reagent disk
reagent disk
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on reagent water on reagent disk
reagent disk
disk
Insufficient acid wash Add acid wash solution
acid wash
solution on sample on specified position of
solution on
disk sample disk
sample disk
Insufficient alkaline Add alkaline wash
alkaline wash
wash solution on solution on specified
solution on
sample disk position of sample disk
sample disk
Add distilled water on
distilled water Insufficient distilled
specified position of
on sample water on sample disk
sample disk
disk
Code Message
C0714 12 Check if lamp is turned
on, and check the
cuvettes on
Page, then replace the
cuvettes marked by
Lamp aged. Lamp is colors. Check the lamp
Light intensity not turned on. Lamp on If failure remains,
is weak is loose. All cuvettes replace the lamp
are dirty Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Page. If light intensity is
not strong enough,
replace the lamp. If
failure still remains,
contact equipment
developer
C0715 0 Check if lamp is turned
on, and check the
cuvettes on
Page, then replace the
Cuvette is dirty. The cuvettes marked by
amount of water to colors. Check the lamp
Blank of
measure the six-th on If failure remains,
cuvette %s
phase water blank is replace the lamp
exceeds limit
not enough. Light Utilities-->Daily Maint.
intensity is too weak Page. If light intensity is
not strong enough,
replace the lamp. If
failure still remains,
contact equipment
developer
C0716 11 Received data is too
Received data Contact equipment
much and exceeds
overflow developer
buffer capacity
C0717 11 Sent data Instruction sending Contact equipment

overflow buffer is full developer
C0718 14 Calibrate the ISE

ISE test results are module when the
not received in given system is paused or
ISE test is
time; ISE module is idle. If problem occurs
timed out
not connected continuously for 3 times
correctly or other error occurs,
contact the developer
Code Message
C0719 12 Check if lamp is
installed correctly and
Lamp is not turned
turned on. If failure
on; bulb is damaged;
remains after replacing
no lamp is installed;
Lamp is not the lamp, contact the
lamp is loose; foreign
turned on develop. Check if
matter exist in three
foreign matters exist in
continuous cuvettes
continuous three
to obstruct light path
cuvettes. Replace the
cuvettes if necessary
C0720 12 No cuvettes are Check if all positions of
No reaction installed in four reaction disk are
cuvettes, or continuous positions; occupied. If yes, ask
lamp intensity photoelectric gain our service personnel to
is too strong exceeds the adjust the photoelectric
measurement range gain
C0721 1 Check for failed cuvette
and replace it. If the
Foreign matters exist
Clots are error remains, check if
to obstruct light path
found in the lamp is installed
so that the measured
No.%s tightly. If the error still
value is less than
cuvette remains for all new
1000
cuvettes, contact our
service personnel
10.2.2 Failures of Analyzing Unit
10.2.2.1 Main Unit

Code Message
A0001 11 Restore failure on
Instruction format
Invalid error. Invalid
page. If this message
command information is
appears for 3 times,
included
A0002 12 Parameter Reset mechanically and
Parameter
downloading failed. retry. If this failure
download
Parameter occurs for 3 times,
error
configuration error contact the developer
A0003 11 Wait for 30-60s and
Downloading retry. If system does not
Main unit is
parameters to respond for long time,
busy
subunits. Cannot restore failure. If this
downloading
respond to other problem occurs
parameters
instruction frequently, contact the
developer
Self-test error Self-test error page. If this message
Code Message
A0005 11 Switch off analyzing unit
power and switch on
again. Restore failure
Invalid
Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
instruction in
error Maint. page. If this
current status
message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
System is
Executing other again. Restore failure
busy. Cannot
instruction. Cannot on Utilities-->Daily
respond to
respond to current Maint. page. If this
other
one message appears for 3
operation
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
Instruction Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
execute error error Maint. page. If this
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
E2PROM read/write on Utilities-->Daily
Memory error
times, contact the
developer
A0009 0 Received data in Rerun. If problem
Photoelectric
single period is less occurs frequently,
data is lost
than 90 contact the developer
A0010 11 If optic measurement
assembly goes wrong,
replace AD assembly. If
AD collection board
Photoelectric AD value is too low works normally,
output is (below 10) or too high remove optic
abnormal (over 65500) measurement
assembly, and check if
preamplification board
and optical path are
normal
A0011 11 Photoelectric data
Photoelectric Restart analyzing unit
buffer is full. Cannot
data overflow and operation unit
process new data
A0012 11 Photoelectric circuit
Photoelectric
does not return result Restart analyzing unit
collection is
via FIFO in specified and operation unit
timed out
time
Code Message
A0013 11
Restart analyzing unit
Downloading Incompatible or and replace with new
failed wrong version version. If failed again,
A0014 11 Connection error. Restart analyzing unit

Handshake Analyzing unit is and shake hand. If
failed performing other failed for 3 times,
operation contact the developer

power and switch on
Execution again. Restore failure
result is not Instruction execution on Utilities-->Daily
received in is timed out Maint. page. If this
given time message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No response,
or response
error
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.2 Sample Probe Unit

Code Message
A0101 6 Reset analyzing unit
power and restart
Instruction format operating software.
Instruction error. Invalid Then retry this
format error information is instruction. If this
included message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction parameter
Then retry this
parameter does not comply with
instruction. If this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
again. Download
Unit is busy. Unit parameters and restore
No execute
does not reset failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily Maint.
A0104 6 Wrong Switch off analyzing unit
sensor power and switch on
status when again. Restore failure
sample Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves message appears for 3
vertically(oth times, contact the
er position) developer
A0105 11 Wrong
Switch off analyzing unit
sensor
power and switch on
status when
sample
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves
vertically(in
times, contact the
reaction
developer
disk)
A0106 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
Vertical position
home Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
position for 3 times, contact the
Obstruction exists in
when developer
vertical direction
moving
vertically(oth
er position)
A0107 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
Restore failure. If failed
position sensor failure.
for 3 times, contact the
when Obstruction exists in
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0108 18 Sample
probe
If auto reset fails,
bumps when Wrong position.
restore failure. Remove
moving Obstruction exists
obstruction and reset
vertically(oth
er position)
A0109 18 Sample
probe
bumps when Wrong position.
vertically(IS
E unit)
Code Message
A0110 18 Sample
probe
bumps when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
moving restore failure. Remove
Obstruction exists
vertically(in obstruction and reset
reaction
disk)
A0111 6 Lowering
down at Sample probe is not
current in vertical home
restore failure. If failed
position is position. Current
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0112 11 Lowering
down at
Sample probe is not
current If auto reset fails,
in vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
position is not proper
allowed(in developer
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
A0113 6 Wrong
sensor
power and switch on
status when
sample
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
moves
horizontally(
times, contact the
other
developer
position)
sample Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe sensor failure Maint. page. If this
moves message appears for 3
horizontally( times, contact the
ISE unit) developer
A0115 11 Wrong
sensor
power and switch on
status when
sample
Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
probe
moves
horizontally(i
times, contact the
n reaction
developer
disk)
Code Message
A0116 6 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(
other
position)
A0117 11 Sample
probe
cannot find
home Rotational position
developer
moving horizontal direction
horizontally(i
n reaction
disk)
A0118 18 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally( horizontally.
other
position)
A0119 11 Sample
probe
collides Sample probe is
when obstructed or falls
restore failure. Check
moving when moving
motor and belt
horizontally(i horizontally.
n reaction
disk)
A0120 6 Sample probe is not
Rotating at
in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
current
position. Current restore failure. If failed
height is not
height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
allowed(oth
for rotation(highest developer
er position)
position)
A0121 11 Rotating at Sample probe is not
current in horizontal home If auto reset fails,
height is not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(in height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
reaction for rotation(highest developer
disk) position)
A0122 6 If auto reset fails,
Syringe
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
wrong status
developer
Code Message
A0123 6 Check if sample syringe
reaches maximum limit
Sample syringe
Syringe and cannot restore.
reaches maximum
cannot find Restore failure, or reset
stroke. Cannot
home after pushing syringe to
restore or dispense
position home position. If failed
sample
developer
A0124 3 Clog Wash sample probe.
Sample probe is
detection Remove probe and
clogged
error clear up foreign matters
A0125 11 Sample
probe does
not detect
No deionized water Add deionized water
wash
solution
level
A0126 1 Sample
probe does
not detect No R1 dispensed. Check if reagent is
liquid level Insufficient R1 sufficient. Rerun
on reaction
disk
A0127 3 Sample
probe does
No sample tube.
not detect Check if sample is
Sample is already
liquid level sufficient. Rerun
depleted
on sample
disk
A0128 1 Insufficient
sample Insufficient sample Check sample volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0129 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
aspirates full for 3 times, contact the
aspirates
abnormally developer
too much
A0130 1 Sample
Sample syringe Restore failure. If failed
syringe
dispenses empty for 3 times, contact the
dispenses
abnormally developer
too much
A0131 1 Sample
Add samples or replace
probe does Insufficient sample.
with standard sample
not aspirate Wrong tube type
tube
sample
A0132 0 Re-centrifugate sample,
Clogs in
Clots in sample or remove clots
sample
manually
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
No again. Restore failure
response, or Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
response error Maint. page. If this
error message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.3 Sample Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
A0203 6 Switch off analyzing
unit power and switch
on again. Download
Unit is busy and does parameters and restore
No execute
not reset failure on
condition
Home Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Cannot find home
position is not page. If this message
position
found appears for 3 times,
Step missed Belt failure page. If this message
Wrong sensor
Sensor failure page. If this message
status
Code Message
A0207 15 Sample barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0208 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0209 15 Rescan after restoring
Bar code
Scanning too many or failure. If this message
sending
too fast appears for 3 times,
buffer is full
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
on again. Restore
No response,
Instruction execute failure on
or response
error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error
10.2.2.4 R1 Probe Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
Wrong sensor power and switch on
R1 probe Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
moves sensor failure Maint. page. If this
vertically(othe message appears for 3
r position) times, contact the
developer
vertically(in message appears for 3
reaction disk) times, contact the
developer
A0306 4 R1 probe
cannot find Vertical position
home position sensor failure.
when moving Obstruction exists in
developer
vertically(othe vertical direction
r position)
A0307 11 R1 probe
cannot find Vertical position
developer
vertically(in vertical direction
reaction disk)
A0308 18 R1 probe
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
vertically(othe obstruction and reset
r position)
A0309 18 R1 probe
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
reaction disk)
A0310 4 Lowering
R1 probe is not in
down at If auto reset fails,
vertical home
current restore failure. If failed
position. Current
position is not for 3 times, contact the
allowed(other developer
for lowering down
position)
Code Message
A0311 11 Lowering
R1 probe is not in
down at If auto reset fails,
vertical home
current restore failure. If failed
position. Current
position is not for 3 times, contact the
for lowering down
reaction disk)
R1 probe Rotational position on Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(ot message appears for 3
her position) times, contact the
developer
Wrong sensor
power and switch on
status when
R1 probe Rotational position
on Utilities-->Daily
moves sensor failure
Maint. If this message
horizontally(in
reaction disk)
A0314 4 R1 probe
cannot find Rotational position
developer
horizontally(ot horizontal direction
her position)
A0315 11 R1 probe
cannot find Rotational position
developer
horizontally(in horizontal direction
reaction disk)
A0316 18 R1 probe
R1 probe is
collides when If auto reset fails,
obstructed or falls
moving restore failure. Check
when moving
horizontally(ot motor and belt
horizontally
her position)
A0317 11 R1 probe
R1 probe is
collides when If auto reset fails,
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally(in motor and belt
horizontally
reaction disk)
A0318 4 R1 probe is not in
horizontal home If auto reset fails,
Rotating is not
allowed(other
position)
position)
Rotating is not
allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
Code Message
Syringe
sensor is in Syringe sensor error
wrong status
developer
A0321 4 Check if R1 syringe
and cannot restore.
R1 syringe reaches
Syringe Restore failure, or reset
maximum stroke.
cannot find after pushing syringe to
Cannot restore or
home position home position. If this
dispense reagent
problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0322 11 R1 probe
does not
No deionized water Add deionized water
detect wash
solution level
A0323 1 R1 probe No R1 or sample or
does not insufficient R1 in
Check if reagent is
detect liquid reaction cuvette when
sufficient. Rerun
level on system dispenses R1
reaction disk or R3
A0324 2 R1 probe
does not No reagent on first
Check if reagent is
detect liquid reagent position.
sufficient. Rerun
level on Reagent is depleted
reagent disk
A0325 1 Insufficient R1
Insufficient R1 Check reagent volume
dispensing
aspiration volume and rerun
volume
A0326 1 R1 syringe Restore failure. If failed
R1 syringe aspirates
aspirates too for 3 times, contact the
full abnormally
much developer
R1 syringe dispenses
dispenses too for 3 times, contact the
empty abnormally
much developer
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No response,
or response
error
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.5 R2 Probe Unit
Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
Wrong
power and switch on
sensor
status when
Vertical position on Utilities-->Daily
R2 probe
moves
vertically(ot
times, contact the
her position)
developer
vertically(in message appears for 3
reaction times, contact the
disk) developer
A0406 5 R2 probe
cannot find
home Vertical position
developer
moving vertical direction
vertically(ot
her position)
Code Message
A0407 11 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Vertical position
position Restore failure. If failed
sensor failure.
when for 3 times, contact the
moving developer
vertical direction
vertically(in
reaction
disk)
A0408 18 R2 probe
bumps
when Wrong position.
vertically(ot
her position)
A0409 18 R2 probe
bumps
when If auto reset fails,
Wrong position.
Obstruction exists
reaction
disk)
A0410 5 Lowering
down at R2 probe is not in
current vertical home
position is position. Current
not position is not proper
developer
allowed(oth for lowering down
er position)
A0411 11 Lowering
down at
R2 probe is not in
current If auto reset fails,
vertical home
position is restore failure. If failed
position. Current
not for 3 times, contact the
for lowering down
reaction
disk)
horizontally( message appears for 3
other times, contact the
position) developer
horizontally( message appears for 3
in reaction times, contact the
disk) developer
Code Message
A0414 5 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Rotational position
sensor failure.
moving developer
horizontal direction
horizontally(
other
position)
A0415 11 R2 probe
cannot find
home
Rotational position
sensor failure.
moving developer
horizontal direction
horizontally(
in reaction
disk)
A0416 18 R2 probe
collides
R2 probe is
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally( motor and belt
horizontally
other
position)
A0417 11 R2 probe
collides
R2 probe is
obstructed or falls
when moving
horizontally( motor and belt
horizontally
in reaction
disk)
Rotating is horizontal home If auto reset fails,
not position. Current restore failure. If failed
allowed(oth height is not proper for 3 times, contact the
er position) for rotation(highest developer
position)
Rotating is
not
allowed(in
reaction
disk)
position)
A0420 5 Syringe If auto reset fails,
sensor is in restore failure. If failed
Syringe sensor error
wrong for 3 times, contact the
status developer
A0421 5 Check if R2 syringe
and cannot restore.
Syringe R2 syringe reaches
Restore failure, or reset
cannot find maximum stroke.
after pushing syringe to
home Cannot restore or
home position. If this
position dispense reagent
problem occurs for 3
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
A0422 11 R2 probe
does not
detect wash No deionized water Add deionized water
solution
level
A0423 1 R2 probe
does not
No R1 or sample or
detect liquid Check if reagent is
insufficient R1 in
level on sufficient. Rerun
cuvette
reaction
disk
A0424 2 R2 probe
No reagent on
does not
second reagent Check if reagent is
detect liquid
position. Reagent is sufficient. Rerun
level on
depleted
reagent disk
A0425 1 Insufficient
R2 Insufficient R2 Check reagent volume
dispensing aspiration volume and rerun
volume
R2 syringe aspirates
aspirates for 3 times, contact the
full abnormally
too much developer
R2 syringe dispenses
dispenses for 3 times, contact the
empty abnormally
too much developer
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
response, Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or response error Maint. page. If this
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.6 Reagent Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
A0504 7 Restore failure. If this
Home
Cannot find home message appears for 3
position is
position times, contact the
not found
developer
Step message appears for 3
Belt failure
missed times, contact the
developer
Wrong
sensor Sensor failure
times, contact the
status
developer
A0507 16 Reagent barcode
Bar code
reader is not installed. Reboot the analyzer. If
reader does
Barcode reader is not problem remains,
not work
connected to PCB contact the developer
normally
properly
A0508 0 Check if barcode label
Barcode digit error. is dirty, skewed, or
Bar code
Data format error. No placed correctly.
error
end mark Rescan or scan after
reprinting
A0509 16 Rescan after resetting
Bar code mechanically. If this
Scanning too many or
sending message appears for 3
too fast
buffer is full times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and switch on
response, Instruction execute on Utilities-->Daily
or response error Maint. page. If this
times, contact the
developer
10.2.2.7 Reaction Disk Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
on again. Download
No execute
condition
A0604 11 Reaction Reaction disk home Restore failure. If this
disk cannot position sensor message appears for 3
find home failure. Coder goes times, contact the
position wrong developer
A0605 11 Reaction
Restore failure. If this
disk missed
Motor failure. Belt message appears for 3
step when
failure times, contact the
moving
developer
horizontally
A0606 11 Reaction Restore failure. If this
disk sensor message appears for 3
Sensor failure
is in wrong times, contact the
status developer
A0608 12 No cuvette on a Load the cuvette or
Light signal specified position or contact the developer
too strong photoelectric gain and adjust
adjusting error photoelectric gain
Photoelectric Photoelectric buffer
on again. If this
buffer is overflow, or FIFO
abnormal overflow
times, contact the
developer
A0610 1 After testing, switch off
analyzing unit power
Photoelectric
Photoelectric and switch on again. If
collection and
data error this message appears
conversion failed
developer
Execution on again. Restore
result is not Instruction execution failure on
received in is timed out Utilities-->Daily Maint.
given time page. If this message
No on again. Restore
response, or Instruction execute failure on
response error Utilities-->Daily Maint.
error page. If this message
10.2.2.8 Reagent Mixer Unit

Error Level Error Message Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
power and restart
included message appears
for 3 times, contact
the developer
power and restart
Instruction operating software.
Instruction parameter does Then retry this
parameter error not comply with instruction. If this
protocol message appears
the developer
Code
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
A0706 9 Reagent mixer
cannot find home Vertical position Restore failure. If
position when sensor failure. failed for 3 times,
moving Obstruction exists contact the
vertically(other in vertical direction developer
position)
vertically(in in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)
A0708 9 Reagent mixer is
Lowering down If auto reset fails,
not in vertical
at current restore failure. If
home position.
position is not failed for 3 times,
Current position is
allowed(other contact the
not proper for
position) developer
lowering down
not in vertical
home position.
Current position is
allowed(in contact the
not proper for
reaction disk) developer
lowering down
Code
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
reagent mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
Rotational position
cannot find home Restore failure. If
sensor failure.
position when failed for 3 times,
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(other developer
direction
position)
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(in developer
direction
reaction disk)
not in horizontal If auto reset fails,
Rotating at
home position. restore failure. If
current height is
Current height is failed for 3 times,
not allowed(other
not proper for contact the
position)
rotation(highest developer
position)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
Code
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
message appears
the developer
10.2.2.9 Sample Mixer Unit

Code
power and restart
included message appears
the developer
power and restart
Instruction operating software.
Instruction parameter does not Then retry this
parameter error comply with instruction. If this
protocol message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Download
Unit is busy and parameters and
No execute
does not reset restore failure on
condition
mechanically Utilities-->Daily
message appears
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(other
message appears
position)
the developer
Code
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Vertical position
Utilities-->Daily
vertically(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
A0806 8 Sample mixer
vertically(other in vertical direction developer
position)
vertically(in in vertical direction developer
reaction disk)
A0808 8 Sample mixer is
not in vertical home
position. Current
position is not
allowed(other contact the
proper for lowering
position) developer
down
not in vertical home
position. Current
position is not
allowed(in contact the
proper for lowering
reaction disk) developer
down
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(other
message appears
position)
the developer
unit power and
Wrong sensor
switch on again.
status when
Restore failure on
sample mixer Rotational position
Utilities-->Daily
horizontally(in
message appears
reaction disk)
the developer
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(other developer
direction
position)
Code
Rotational position
sensor failure.
Obstruction exists
moving contact the
in horizontal
horizontally(in developer
direction
reaction disk)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(other
position)
position)
Rotating at
current height is
not allowed(in
reaction disk)
position)
unit power and
switch on again.
Execution result Instruction Restore failure on
is not received in execution is timed Utilities-->Daily
given time out Maint. page. If this
message appears
the developer
unit power and
switch on again.
Restore failure on
No response, or Instruction execute
Utilities-->Daily
response error error
message appears
the developer
10.2.2.10 Temperature Unit

Code Message
power and restart
times, contact the
developer
Code Message
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction Instruction
Then retry this
parameter parameter does not
error comply with protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
Unit is busy. operating software.
No execute Instruction conflicts. Then retry this
condition Instruction buffer is instruction. If this
full message appears for 3
times, contact the
developer
A0904 0 Reset hardware on
Reaction page and restart
Reaction disk
disk reaction disk
temperature
temperature temperature control. If
collection error
is too high this message appears
developer
page and restart
Wash Preheat
reaction disk
solution is temperature
temperature control. If
too hot collection error
this message appears
developer
Reaction page and restart
Reaction disk
disk reaction disk
temperature
collection error
is fluctuated this message appears
developer
Wash page and restart
Preheat
solution reaction disk
temperature
collection error
is fluctuated this message appears
developer
Reaction
page and restart
disk Reaction disk
reaction disk
temperature temperature
temperature control. If
control is collection error
this message appears
switched off
developer
Code Message
Preheat page and restart
Preheat
temperature reaction disk
temperature
control is temperature control. If
collection error
switched off this message appears
developer
Reaction
disk
Reaction disk page and restart
temperature
is not
collection error. temperature control. If
steady in
Heater control error this message appears
specified
time
developer
Wash
solution
Preheat page and restart
temperature
is not
collection error. temperature control. If
steady in
Heater control error this message appears
specified
time
developer
A0912 0 Refrigerator
Fan circuit failed. Contact equipment
fans are
Fan is damaged developer
abnormal
power and switch on
Execution
Instruction again. Restore failure on
result is not
execution is timed Utilities-->Daily Maint.
received in
out page. If this message
given time
power and switch on
No
again. Restore failure on
response, Instruction execute
or response error
error
A0915 0 Reaction
disk Reaction disk
temperature temperature sensor Contact equipment
sensor is is disconnected or developer
not damaged
connected
A0916 0 Preheat
Preheat
temperature
temperature sensor Contact equipment
sensor is
is disconnected or developer
not
damaged
connected
A0917 0 Pressure
Fan control circuit
machine Contact equipment
error, or fan is
fans developer
damaged
abnormal
10.2.2.11 Wash Unit
Code Message

power and restart
times, contact the
developer
power and restart
operating software.
Then retry this
error protocol
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
again. Download
No execute
condition
power and restart
operating software.
Instruction
Wash unit is busy or Then retry this
execution
abnormal instruction. If this
is timed out
times, contact the
developer
A1005 11 Wash unit If auto reset fails,
cannot restore failure. Remove
reach obstruction and reset. If
vertical direction
home problem remains,
position contact the developer
Wash unit
cannot Obstruction exists in
obstruction and reset. If
leave home vertical direction
problem remains,
position
A1007 11 Remove foreign
matters, and restore
Wash unit bumps. failure on
Wash unit
Obstruction exists. Utilities-->Daily Maint.
bumps
Mechanical failure page. If problem
remains, contact the
developer
Code Message
A1008 17 High-conce
Liquid level sensor is
ntration Empty
abnormal. Waste
waste high-concentration
buffer is not emptied
buffer is too waste buffer
in time
high
A1009 17 Low-conce
Liquid level sensor is
ntration Empty
abnormal. Waste
waste low-concentration waste
buffer is not emptied
buffer is too buffer
in time
high
A1010 17 Waste pump
abnormal. Liquid
Waste
sensor abnormal.
buffer level Troubleshoot failed part
External sewer
is too high
blocked. Tubing fell
off
A1011 17 Liquid sensor
abnormal. Inlet valve Troubleshoot failed part.
abnormal. Water Execute "System
Water tank
treatment system Prime" and select
level is too
abnormal. Water "Water
low
supply unit abnormal. Tank/Probes/Mixers
10psig pressure Prime"
abnormal
A1012 17 Liquid sensor
abnormal. Inlet valve
Water tank abnormal. Water
level is too treatment system Troubleshoot failed part
high abnormal. Water
supply unit abnormal.
Main filter abnormal
A1013 10 Valve abnormal. No Troubleshoot failed part.
Diluted diluted wash solution. Execute "System
wash tank Water tank level too Prime" and select
is too low low. Liquid level "Diluted Wash Solution
sensor abnormal Tank Prime"
A1014 0 Valve abnormal. No
Concentrat concentrated wash
Troubleshoot failed part.
ed wash solution. Water tank
Execute "Concentrated
tank is too level too low. Liquid
Wash Solution Refill"
low level sensor
abnormal
Pump/valv Utilities-->Daily Maint.
Pump failure. Valve
e goes page. If this message
failure
wrong appears for 3 times,
Code Message
A1016 12 Air pump/valve

abnormal. Container Identify failed part.
leakage. Vacuum Check if vacuum level is
Vacuum
filter/one-way valve normal by reading
pressure is
clogged. Connector pressure gauge on
abnormal
leakage. Water hydropneumatic
accumulation in assembly panel
vacuum container
abnormal. High
pressure protection of
Identify failed part.
pressure switch
Check if 25psig is
25psig started. Protection
normal by reading
pressure is valve abnormal.
pressure gauge on
abnormal Container leakage.
hydropneumatic
Oil
assembly panel
separator/one-way
valve clogged.
Connector leakage
abnormal. High
pressure switch
started. Protection
Check if 10psig is
10psig valve abnormal.
normal by reading
pressure is Container leakage.
pressure gauge on
abnormal Oil
hydropneumatic
separator/one-way
assembly panel
valve clogged.
Connector leakage.
Precision regulation
valve abnormal
abnormal. High
pressure switch
started. Protection
Check if 5psig is normal
5psig valve abnormal.
by reading pressure
pressure is Container leakage.
gauge on
abnormal Oil
hydropneumatic
separator/one-way
assembly panel
valve clogged.
Connector leakage.
Precision regulation
valve abnormal
A1020 12 Wash
Interior wash valve
solution
abnormal. Water tank
flow for
level too low. 10psig Troubleshoot failed part
probe
pressure abnormal.
interior is
Other valve abnormal
abnormal
Code Message
A1021 12 Wash
solution
flow for Exterior wash valve
Troubleshoot failed part
probe/bar abnormal
exterior is
abnormal
A1022 12 Wash
probe/tubing/check
Cuvette valve clogged.
Troubleshoot failed part
overflow Vacuum pressure
abnormal. Wash unit
abnormal
A1023 12 Wash probe clogged.
No wash Connector leakage.
solution is 10psig pressure
dispensed abnormal. Water tank Troubleshoot failed part
into level too low. Preheat
cuvettes module abnormal.
Loose connector
A1024 12 Tubing pressure not
released completely.
Air pump
High pressure Troubleshoot failed part
cannot start
protection of pressure
switch started
A1025 12 Dilution
Pressure of diluted
cannot
wash solution tank is
proceed Troubleshoot failed part
not released
successfull
completely
y
A1026 12 Water
accumulate Waste buffer level too
Troubleshoot failed part.
s in reagent high. Waste tubing
Arrange waste tubing
disk and clogged
wash well
A1027 0 Check the inlet tubing
Water tank
Water flow is weak, or connection. If error
cannot be
floater goes wrong remain, contact the
filled
developer
A1028 11 Pressure
Sensor is damaged
sensor Contact the developer
or disconnected
check error
A1029 11 Pressure
sensor Sensor goes wrong
Contact the developer
calibration during maintenance
error
Code Message

power and switch on
times, contact the
developer
power and switch on
No
response,
or
response
error
times, contact the
developer
A1032 10 Diluted Valve goes wrong. No Troubleshoot failed part.
wash diluted wash solution. Execute "System
solution B Distilled water is not Prime" and select
is not enough. Liquid-level "Diluted Wash Solution
enough sensor goes wrong Tank Prime"
A1033 0 Valve goes wrong. No
Concentrat Troubleshoot failed part.
concentrated wash
ed wash Execute "System
solution. Distilled
solution B Prime" and select
water is not enough.
is not "Concentrated Wash
Liquid-level sensor
enough Solution Refill"
goes wrong
A1034 0 Shut down the analyzer.
High-conce High-concentration
Check and empty the
ntration waste is full, or
high-concentration
waste high-concentration
waste tank. If error
bucket is waste bucket sensor
remains, contact the
too high goes wrong
developer
A1035 17 Shut down the analyzer.
Vacuum
Liquid builds up in Empty the vacuum tank.
container is
vacuum container If error remains, contact
too high
the developer
A1036 12 Pressure of
Turn off air pump and
25psig
Air pump is blocked turn on again. If the
gauge is
and cannot work error remains, shut
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
25psig
gauge is Tubing are leaking or Shut down the analyzer
less than not connected and check the fluidic
20psig in properly tubing connection
standby
status
Code Message
Adjust the protection
25psign
Protection valve is valve to increase
gauge is
not adjusted correctly pressure to
within
25psig(0.172MPa)
27-35psig
A1039 12 Shut down the analyzer,
Pressure of
clean the tubing, check
25psign Protection valve and
the protection valve,
gauge is one-way valve are
pressure switch, power
greater blocked. Tubing is
supply and power cord.
than 35psig clogged or broken
Then start up the
at any time
analyzer
A1040 12 Vacuum
pressure is
greater
than
down the analyzer
-0.5psig
A1041 12 Vacuum
pressure is
greater Tubing are leaking or Shut down the analyzer
than not connected and check the fluidic
-10psig in properly tubing connection
standby
status
10psig
gauge is
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
10psig
standby
status
A1044 12 Pressure of Shut down the analyzer,
Inlet valve cannot be
10psign check the water supply
turned off. Water tank
gauge is and floater of water
overflow. Pressure
greater tank. Replace the inlet
too high
than 13psig valve if necessary
5psig
gauge is
less than
down the analyzer
1psig
5psig
standby
status
Code Message
A1047 12 Result
error:
Diluted
wash
Not enough pressure Contact the developer
solution
tank
emptying
failed
A1048 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing clogged Troubleshoot the tubing
pressure
releasing
failed
A1049 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing leaking Troubleshoot the tubing
pressure
establishin
g failed
A1050 12 Result
error:
Diluted
Pressure cannot
wash Restart the vacuum and
reach the expected
solution pressure gauges
value
tank
priming
failed
A1051 12 Result
error:
System
Tubing clogged Troubleshoot the tubing
vacuum
releasing
failed
A1052 12 Result
error:
System
vacuum
establishin
g failed
A1053 12 Result
error:
10psig
pressure
establishin
g failed
A1054 12 Result
error: 5psig
pressure Tubing leaking Troubleshoot the tubing
establishin
g failed
Code Message
A1055 12 Result Air pump is blocked Shut down the air

error: and cannot work pump, and then restart
system it. If it is still abnormal,
pressure stop the instrument; if it
and is normal, continue to
vacuum do use it.
not restore
in specified
time after
emptying
the
secondary
vacuum
container.
A1056 17 The liquid Low-concentration Check the
level of the waste overflows. low-concentration waste
internal outlet tubing.
waste
overflow
bucket is
too high.
Pump and valve
Execute failure
Emptying failure. Cannot turn
recovery. If it repeats
vacuum off air pump. Cannot
A1057 12 continuously for 5 times,
container empty excessive
please contact the
failed. moisture within 30
developer
seconds
A1058 10 Concentrat Concentrated wash Troubleshoot failed part.
ed wash solution reagent Replace the
bottle bottle empty; concentrated wash
empty. pressure abnormal; reagent box and
tubing connection execute failure
error. recovery.
Sucking in SV14 failure; tubing Execute failure
concentrat leaking; air pump recovery. If it repeats
ed wash abnormal continuously for 5 times,
A1059 12 failed due please contact the
to developer
insufficient
vacuum.
Vacuum SV14 failure; tubing Execute failure
does not leaking; air pump recovery. If it repeats
restore in abnormal continuously for 5 times,
specified please contact the
A1060 12
time after developer
sucking in
concentrat
ed wash
A1061 17 Air pump is Auto wash is Execute failure
off. Wash is forbidden when air recovery. If it repeats
forbiden. pump is off. Primary continuously for 5 times,
vacuum container please contact the
high level warning will developer
turn off air pump
Code Message
A1062 10 Concentrat Concentrated buffer Troubleshoot failed part.

ed wash bottle is empty; Execute failure
tank empty. vacuum abnormal; recovery.
pressure abnormal.
A1063 10 Diluted Valve abnormal. No Troubleshoot failed part.
wash tank diluted wash solution. Execute failure
empty Water tank level too recovery.
(Time lapse low. Liquid level
45 sensor abnormal.
seconds) Pressure abnormal
Primary Floater to highest Execute failure
vacuum level due to recovery. If it repeats
A1064 17 container excessive moisture continuously for 5 times,
high level built up in primary please contact the
warning vacuum container. developer
10.2.2.12 ISE Unit

Code Message
A1101 14 ISE unit Reconnect. Reset ISE
ISE unit connection
handshake unit. Power on ISE unit
error
is abnormal again
A1102 14 ISE unit is ISE unit is executing Wait a moment, and
busy other instruction re-execute ISE instruction
A1103 14 Power switched off.
Communication
Reconnect to power.
failed. Serial cable
ISE unit Reconnect serial cable.
damaged or
does not Perform ISE initialization.
unconnected. Module
respond Contact the developer to
connector damaged.
replace board
Board elements
damaged
A1104 14 Reinstall sensor. Replace
Electrode installation calibrant B and rerun, if
incorrect. Calibrator still low, replace calibrant
expired. Electrode A and rerun. Replace
Na+
degenerated. Bubbles failed sensor and rerun.
electrode
in reference Reinstall electrode,
slope is out
electrode. Reference eliminate bubbles and
of standard
electrode damaged. calibrate. Replace
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Na+
Module or tubing electrode and rerun.
temperature above 37 Monitor temperature, if too
high, relocate equipment
A1105 14 K+ Electrode installation Reinstall sensor. Replace
electrode incorrect. Calibrator calibrant B and rerun, if
slope is out expired. Electrode still low, replace calibrant
of standard degenerated. Bubbles A and rerun. Replace
range in reference failed sensor and rerun.
electrode. Reference Reinstall electrode,
Code Message
electrode damaged. eliminate bubbles and
Electrodes interfered. calibrate. Replace
Module or tubing reference or K+ electrode
temperature above 37 and rerun. Monitor
temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment
Cl-
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Cl- electrode
Module or tubing and rerun. Monitor
temperature above 37 temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment
Li+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Li+ electrode
relocate equipment
A1108 14 Replace electrode and
Na+ Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
electrode degenerated. Noise noise. If board element is
noise error spike interference damaged, replace the
board
K+ Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
board
Cl- Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
board
Li+ Electrode rerun. Check for electrical
board
A1112 14 Na+, K+, Reference electrode Replace reference
Cl-, Li+ degenerated. electrode and rerun.
electrodes Environment Check for electrical noise.
noise error interfered by electrical Check unit grounding. If
Code Message
noise spike board element is
damaged, replace the
board
A1113 14 Replace failed electrode
Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Na+
degenerated. New channel and recalibrate. In
electrode
electrode or new case of new electrode,
drift
calibrant A is used drift may occur, wait for 15
minutes and test again
K+
electrode
drift
Cl-
electrode
drift
Li+
electrode
drift
A1117 14 Replace reference
Reference electrode
electrode and rerun.
Na+, K+, degenerated.
Check for electrical noise.
Cl-, Li+ Environmental electric
If board element is
electrodes pulse. New electrode
damaged, replace the
drift or new calibrant A is
board. Check calibrant A
used
channel and recalibrate
Na+ Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
electrode degenerated. New channel and recalibrate. In
voltage electrode or new case of new electrode,
overflow calibrant A is used drift may occur, wait for 15
K+ Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Cl- Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
Code Message
Li+ Electrode and run. Check calibrant A
A1122 14 Replace reference
Reference electrode
Na+, K+, electrode and rerun.
degenerated.
Cl-, Li+ Check for electrical noise.
Environmental electric
electrodes If board element is
pulse. New electrode
voltage damaged, replace the
or new calibrant A is
overflow board. Check calibrator A
used
channel and recalibrate
A1123 3 If sample is less than 70µl,
Insufficient sample.
increase sample volume.
Sample not aspirated
Fill sufficient sample in
Air in to measurement
tube. In case of wrong
sample chamber. Tubing
electrode installation,
aged. Pump tubing
install again. Replace the
clogged or too long
tubing
A1124 14 Check spring/sealing ring.
Ensure all electrodes/O
Calibrant A depleted.
rings are correct. Launch a
Tubing unconnected.
wash procedure.
Calibrant A pump
Disassemble the unit and
failure. Tubing
reinstall sensor. Replace
Air in clogged/cracked/bent.
bubble detector, waste
calibrant A Fibrin and salt in
pump, or calibrant A and
electrode tubing.
recalibrate.
Bubble detector
Reconnect/replace tubing.
failure. Waste pump
Check electrical
failure
connection. Replace pump
housing, motor, or tubing
A1125 14 In case of wrong electrode
installation, check spring
and sealing ring. Ensure
Air in calibrant B.
all electrodes and O rings
Fibrin and salt in
are installed correctly.
Air in electrode tubing.
Press Clean on water
calibrant B Bubble detector
treatment system to wash.
failure. Waste pump
Disassemble this unit and
failure
wash and reinstall sensor.
Replace bubble detector.
Replace waste pump.
A1126 14 In case of wrong electrode
installation, check spring
and sealing ring. Ensure
Air in calibrant B and
all electrodes and O rings
A. Fibrin and salt in
are installed correctly.
Air in electrode tubing.
Press Clean on water
cleaner Bubble detector
treatment system to wash.
failure. Waste pump
Disassemble this unit and
failure
wash and reinstall sensor.
Replace bubble detector.
Replace waste pump.
Code Message
A1127 14 Calibrator A/B
No fluid in Replace reagent package.
depleted. No sample
tubing Check the tubing
or cleaning solution
A1128 14 Instruction Instruction format
Please contact the
execute error, or parameter
developer
error error
A1129 14 Calibrations ISE unit cannot store
Recalibrate
saving error calibration results
A1130 14 Bubble
Bubble detector is Replace the bubble
detector
damaged detector
failure
A1131 14
Calibrate repeatedly. If
Electrode slope is out problem remains, reinstall
Calibration
of range during failed electrode. If problem
failed
calibration still remains, replace the
electrode
A1132 14 If maintaining, send

instruction again, if testing,
Instruction Instruction format rerun. Otherwise restart
execute error. Parameter error. operation unit and
error No execute condition analyzing unit. If this
problem remains, contact
the developer

power and switch on
Execution
again. Reset mechanically
result is not Instruction execution
on Utilities-->Alignment
received in is timed out
given time

power and switch on
No
again. Reset mechanically
response, Instruction execute
on Utilities-->Alignment
or response error
error
A1135 0 Electrode installation Reinstall sensor. Replace

incorrect. Calibrator calibrant B and rerun, if
Na+ expired. Electrode still low, replace calibrant
electrode degenerated. Bubbles A and rerun. Replace
slope is out in reference failed sensor and rerun.
of standard electrode. Reference Reinstall electrode,
range electrode damaged. eliminate bubbles and
Electrodes interfered. calibrate. Replace
Module or tubing reference or Na+
Code Message
temperature above 37 electrode and rerun.
Monitor temperature, if too
high, relocate equipment

K+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or K+ electrode
relocate equipment
Cl-
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Cl- electrode
relocate equipment
Li+
electrode
slope is out
of standard
range
Electrodes interfered. reference or Li+ electrode
relocate equipment
10.2.2.13 Others
Code Message
A1401 11 Undefined Generated error Upgrade the operating

failure code is out of software, or contact the
defined range service engineer
11 Calculation Methods
11.1 Reaction Types

The system provides three reaction types for measurement:
Endpoint
Fixed-time
Kinetic
11.1.1 Endpoint
The endpoint or, more correctly, equilibrium method, is most ideal. The reaction
reaches equilibrium after a period of time. Since the equilibrium constant is very large,
it can be considered that all substrates (analytes) have changed into products, and
absorbance of the reaction liquid does not change any more. The absorbance
change is directly proportional to the analytes concentration.
The endpoint reaction is largely insensitive to minor changes in such condition

changes as amount of enzyme, pH value and temperature, provided the changes are
not significant enough to affect the reaction time.
11 Calculation Methods 11-1

11.1.1.1 Single-reagent
Figure 11-1 Single-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-1, R1 is the time when reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the
absorbance reading is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.
On the Basics window of the Test page, enter:

Reaction time: L and 14≤L≤M≤80 and M-4≤L
M
Reagent blank time: 1≤N≤P<13, P-4≤N or N=P=0 (one-point analysis)
N and P
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai,

If L=M Enter two Ms. One measuring point is applied. The
reaction absorbance is the absorbance at M, that is, Ai
＝AM.
If L=M-1 Enter M-1 and M. Two measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the average of absorbance
AM + AM −1
at M-1 and M, that is, Ai＝ .
2
If L=M-2 Enter M-2 and M. Three measuring points are applied.
The reaction absorbance is the remaining one when the
maximum and minimum absorbance is removed.
If L=M-3 or L=M-4 Enter M-3 and M or M-4 and M. Four or five measuring
points are applied. The reaction absorbance is the
average of remaining absorbance when the maximum
and minimum ones are removed.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab,

Follow the Ai calculation steps stated above.
Reaction response calculation: R = Ai − k1 Ab or R = Ai ( reagent blank time is

0)
VR1
Where, k1 = is a volume correction factor for single-reagent analysis.
VR1 + VS
VR1 and VS are volumes of first reagent and sample. K1Ab is reagent blank
correction value.
11-2 11 Calculation Methods

Reagent blank absorbance can be subtracted from the reaction absorbance but
sample blank cannot. To correct the response with sample blank, you should request
sample blank separately, whose response is Rsb = Ai − k1 Ab . The response after
being corrected by sample blank is R
'
= R − RSb .
11.1.1.2 Double-reagent
Figure 11-2 Double-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-2, R1, S and R2 are the time when first reagent, sample and
second reagent are respectively dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches
equilibrium and the absorbance reading is taken. The sample blank is tested during N
and P.

Reaction time: [L][M] 43 ≤L≤M≤80 and M-4≤L
Reagent blank time: 14≤N≤P≤42, P-4≤N or N=P=0
[N][P]
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in 11.1.1.1
Single-reagent.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
11.1.1.1 Single-reagent.
Calculate the reaction response using the following equation:
R = Ai − k2 Ab or R = Ai (reagent blank time is 0)

VR1 + VS
Where, K2Ab is sample blank correction value. k2 = is a volume
VR1 + VS + VR 2
correction factor for double-reagent analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first
reagent, sample and second reagent.

11.1.1.3 Triple- or Quadruple-reagent
Figure 11-3 Triple-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
Figure 11-4 Quadruple-reagent Endpoint Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-3 and Figure 11-4, R1, S, R2, R3 and R4 are the time when
first reagent, sample, second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent are
respectively dispensed. From L to M the reaction reaches equilibrium and the
absorbance reading is taken. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

Reaction time: L and Triple-reagent analysis: 92≤L≤M≤170 and M-4≤L;
M
Quadruple-reagent analysis: 133≤L≤M≤170 and M-4≤L.
Reagent blank time: Triple-reagent analysis: 43≤N≤P≤90, P-4≤N or N=P=0;
N and P
Quadruple-reagent analysis: 92≤N≤P≤132, P-4≤N or
N=P=0.
To calculate reaction absorbance Ai, follow the relevant steps stated in 11.1.1.1
Single-reagent.
To calculate reagent blank absorbance Ab, follow the relevant steps stated in
11.1.1.1 Single-reagent.
Reaction response calculation:
Triple-reagent R = Ai − k 3 Ab or R = Ai (reagent blank time is 0)
analysis
VR1 + VS + VR2
k3 = is a volume correction factor
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3
for triple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2 and VR3 are
volumes of first reagent, sample, second reagent and third
reagent.
Quadruple-reagent R = Ai − k 4 Ab or R = Ai ( reagent blank time is 0)

analysis VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3
k4 = is a volume
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
correction factor for quadruple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS,
VR2, VR3 and VR4 are volumes of first reagent, sample,
second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent.
11.1.2 Fixed-time
For the fixed-time reaction method, namely, first-order kinetic method or initial rate
method, the reaction velocity (v) within a specific period, is directly proportional to the
substrate concentration [S], that is, v=k[S]. As the substrate is consumed
continuously, the reaction velocity becomes smaller and smaller, and so does the
absorbance change rate. It takes much time for such a reaction to reach equilibrium.
Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any time. The reaction can,
however, become steady only after a lag because it is complicated at the beginning
and there are miscellaneous reactions due to complex serum compositions.
For any first order reaction, the substrate concentration [S] at given time since
reaction starts is obtained by the following formula:
[S ] = [S 0 ]× e − kt .
Where,
[S0] - Initial substrate concentration

e - Base of the natural log
k - Velocity constant
The change in substrate concentration ∆[S] over a fixed time interval, t1 to t 2 , is
related to [S0] by the following equation:
− ∆[ S ]
[ S 0] = − kt1 − kt 2
e −e
That is, within a fixed time interval, the change in substrate concentration is directly
proportional to its initial concentration. This is the general property of first-order
reactions. Within this interval, absorbance change is directly proportional to the
analytes concentration.
The fixed-time method is available in single-interval and double-interval according to

input mode of measuring points. Sample blank, namely, the absorbance change at
two points within the incubation time, is subtracted from the reaction absorbance in
double-interval reaction.
Substrate depletion can be checked in fixed-time reaction, and corresponding flag will
be marked in case of substrate depletion.

11.1.2.1 Single-reagent
Figure 11-5 Single-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-5, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L and M.

Reaction time: L and 14 ≤L<M ≤80;
M
Reagent blank time: Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
N and P

A − AL
R= M
tM − t L
11.1.2.2 Double-reagent
Figure 11-6 Double-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are
respectively taken at L and M. The reagent blank is tested at N and P.

Reaction time: L and M 43 ≤L<M ≤80;
Single-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank N=P=0
[N][P]
Double-interval fixed-time: Reagent blank 14≤N<P≤42
[N][P]

Single-interval AM − AL
fixed-time R= ;
tM − tL
Double-interval AM − AL A − AN
fixed-time R= − k2 P
tM − tL tP − tN
VR1 + VS
Where, k2 = is a volume correction factor for double-reagent
VR1 + VS + VR 2
analysis. VR1, VS and VR2 are volumes of first reagent, sample and second reagent.
11.1.2.3 Triple- or Quadruple-reagent

Figure 11-7 Triple-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
Figure 11-8 Quadruple-reagent Fixed-time Reaction Curve
respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at L and M.
The reagent blank is tested during N and P
On the Basics window of the Test page

Triple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time[L][M] 92≤L<M≤170；
[N][P]
[N][P]
Quadruple analysis, enter:
Reaction time[L][M] 134≤L<M≤171

[N][P]
[N][P]

Triple-reagent analysis
For single-interval fixed-time, AM − AL
R=
tM − tL
For double-interval fixed-time, AM − AL A − AN
R= − k3 P
tM − tL tP − tN
Quadruple-reagent analysis
For single-interval fixed-time, AM − AL
R=
tM − tL
For double-interval fixed-time AM − AL A − AN
reaction, R= − k4 P
tM − tL tP − tN
VR1 + VS + VR2
Where, k3 = is a volume correction factor for
triple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2 and VR3 are volumes of first reagent,
sample, second reagent and third reagent.
k4 = is a volume correction factor for
VR1 + VS + VR2 + VR3 + VR4
quadruple-reagent analysis. VR1, VS, VR2, VR3 and VR4 are volumes of first
reagent, sample, second reagent, third reagent and fourth reagent.
11.1.3 Kinetic
For the kinetic method, namely, zero-order kinetic or continuous-monitoring method,
the reaction velocity is not related to substrate concentration and remains constant
during the reaction process. As a result, for a given wavelength, the absorbance of
the analytes changes evenly, and the change rate (∆A/min) is directly proportional to
the activity or concentration of the analytes. The kinetic method is usually used to
measure enzyme activity.
In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be high enough, and the
reaction will be no longer a zero-order reaction when the substrate is consumed to a
certain degree. Therefore, the theory only stands within certain period. In addition,
the reaction can become steady only after a certain period of time, because the
reaction is complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to
complex serum compositions.
In Kinetic reaction, the concentration or activity is obtained according to absorbance

change among specified measuring points.
The Kinetic method is available in single-interval Kinetic and double-interval Kinetic

according to input mode of measuring points.

11.1.3.1 Calculation Flow of Kinetic Method
Figure 11-9 Calculation Flow in Kinetic Reaction
Determine linearity range
Calculate response with least

square method
Judge the linearity
11.1.3.2 Determination of Linearity Range

The absorbance linearity range should be determined based on the substrate
depletion limit.
You should determine the linearity range within the reaction time other than the
reagent blank period.
Figure 11-10 Linearity Range Determination of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)

Figure 11-11 Linearity Range of Kinetic Method (Increased Reaction)
Figure 11-10 shows the linearity range determination process for increased reaction.
In decreased reaction, the “≤” in Figure 11-10 should be changed into “≥”.
The number of measuring points (N) in substrate limit should be counted.

If N>=3, The linearity range includes all measuring points from
reaction start point to substrate depletion point. Otherwise
“NLN” alarm message is displayed.
If N=0 or N=1, No calculation is performed and only alarm message is
displayed.
If N=2 or N=3, An alarm message is displayed. Two or three measuring
points are applied to calculate the reaction response.
11.1.3.3 Response Calculation

Single-reagent
Figure 11-12 Single-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
As shown in Figure 11-12, R1 is the time when first reagent is dispensed and S when
sample is dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M.

Reaction time: L and M 14≤L<M ≤80;

Reagent blank time: N Appear in grey and cannot be entered.
and P

R=⊿ALM
⊿ is the absorbance change rate per minute (slope of reaction curve) during L and
M and calculated by the least squares method.
Double-reagent
Figure 11-13 Double-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
second reagent are respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken
during L and M. The reagent blank is tested during N and P.

Reaction time: L and M 43≤L≤M≤80
[N][P]
[N][P]

R=⊿ALM－K2⊿ANP
Triple- or Quadruple-reagent
Figure 11-14 Triple-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve

Figure 11-15 Quadruple-reagent Kinetic Reaction Curve
respectively dispensed. The absorbance readings are taken during L and M. The
reagent blank is tested during N and P.
On the Basics window of the Test page,

Triple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 92≤L<M≤170;
[N][P]
[N][P]
Quadruple-reagent analysis, enter:
Reaction time: L and M 133≤L<M≤170;
[N][P]
[N][P]

Triple-reagent analysis
For single-interval Kinetic reaction, For single-interval Kinetic reaction,
For double-interval Kinetic reaction, For double-interval Kinetic reaction,
Quadruple-reagent analysis
For single-interval Kinetic reaction, For single-interval Kinetic reaction,
For double-interval Kinetic reaction, For double-interval Kinetic reaction,
11.1.3.4 Linearity Check
∆A f − ∆Ab
Linearity= × 100 < Linearity Limit
∆Au ,v
Where, ∆A f , ∆Ab and ∆Au ,v are the absorbance change rates at the beginning
and end of reaction, and of all measuring points. These three values are calculated
based on the number of measuring points within the linearity range.

When N>9, ∆A f is the absorbance change rate of first 6
measuring points, ∆Ab of last 6 measuring
points, and ∆Au ,v of all measuring points.
When 4 ≤ N ≤ 8 , ∆A f is the absorbance change rate of first 3
measuring points, ∆Ab of last 3 measuring
points, and ∆Au ,v of all measuring points.
When N ≤ 3 Linearity is not checked.
When Linearity is not checked.

∆A f − ∆Ab ≤ 0.006A/minute
or ∆Au ,v ≤ 0.006A/minute,
11.1.3.5 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension

Figure 11-16 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension
During the high-activity enzyme test, the substrate may be depleted quickly and the
reaction curve will appear obviously nonlinear (a smooth curve). If measurement is
performed by the ordinary procedure, the “No linear interval” alarm will be triggered,
reminding user to rerun the test after diluting the sample. This will more or less bring
troubles to user.
The system provides the enzyme linearity range extension function, which is
introduced as follows:
When the number of measuring points(N) within the linearity range is less than 2, the
enzyme linearity range extension can be implemented.
The maximum reaction rate(⊿Amax) is calculated based on all measuring points

which include that within the lag time and then considered as the response of the
sample. If less than 2 measuring points during the lag time experience substrate
depletion, no result will be calculated and “ENC(No calculation interval)” is flagged.
⊿Amax is calculated as follows:

If the reaction start time is t1, reaction time is tL-tM, then t1-tL is the lag time. If the
valid measuring points(N<2) within tL-tM are too few to calculate the response, the
reaction rate can be calculated based on all measuring points during t1-tM using the
formula: ⊿A＝(Ai＋1-Ai)/（ti＋1－ti）. (i＝1, 2…M)The maximum ⊿A, namely ⊿Amax,
is taken as the response of the sample. Therefore, the enzyme linearity range is
extended via the lag time.
11.1.4 QC Rule
11.1.4.1 Westgard Multi-rule

Westgard multi-rule is shown below.
Symbol Explanation QC Conclusion

12S One control value exceeds ±2 Warning
standard deviations.
13S One control value exceeds ±3 Out-of-control (random
standard deviations. error, systematic error)
22S Two consecutive control values for Out-of-control
one level exceed ±2 standard (systematic error)
deviations.
R4S The difference between two Out-of-control (random
consecutive control values error)
exceeds 4 standard deviations.
41S Four consecutive control values for Out-of-control
one level exceed ±1 standard (systematic error)
deviation.
10X Ten consecutive control values for Out-of-control
one level lie on one side of the (systematic error)
mean.
Westgard multi-rule QC conclusion flow for single control is shown in Figure 7-10.
Figure 11-17 Westgard Multi-rule QC Conclusion Flow
For several controls, the conclusion logic is similar to the above condition, except for
multiple continuous QC data, which should be combined simultaneously.

11.1.4.2 Cumulative Sum Check
Regarding different requirements to the QC result, cumulative sum check usually
adopts three controlling methods, which are mainly used to monitor the systematic
error of the testing methods. Where, x - average value, SD - standard deviation.
Controlling Methods Threshold (k) Limit(h)
CS-(1.0SD: 2.7SD) x ±1.0SD ±2.7SD
CS-(1.0SD: 3.0SD) x ±1.0SD ±3.0SD
CS-(0.5SD: 5.1SD) x ±0.5SD ±5.1SD
11.1.4.3 Twin-plot
In the system, Twin-plot, which has no detailed rules, is present only as a whole chart
to help you make a QC conclusion.
Figure 11-18 Twin-plot
+3SD
+2SD
-2SD
-3SD
-3SD -2SD Y +2SD +3SD
The chart can sensitively indicate the systematic errors and random errors.
11.2 Prozone Check

During reaction of antigen and antibody, the amount of generated insoluble
compound is closely related to the proportion between antigen and antibody. When
antigen and antibody is proportioned properly, maximum amount of insoluble
compound is generated, that is, least light is passed and absorbance is the highest.
Otherwise, amount of insoluble compound is reduced, more light is passed, and
absorbance is decreased. Therefore, very high concentration samples may produce
insoluble compound equivalent to low samples and thus an incorrect result can be
reported. The antigen-antibody dose reaction is shown in Figure11-19.
Prozone check is used for Endpoint analysis only.

Figure11-19 Antigen-antibody Dose Reaction Curve
11.2.1 Antigen Addition

Antigen excess can be tested by further addition of antigen. When enough antibodies
are provided, the antigen reacts with them in reaction medium and forms into stable
compound particles, thus producing dispersed light, which increases dynamically with
compound amount increased and reaction time extended (antibody excess). If
antibody keeps excess in specified period, it will continue to react with further added
antigen, and reaction will increase accordingly. If antigen is excess before further
addition, the reaction will decrease. The reaction curve for further addition of antigen
is shown in the figure below.
Figure11-20 Reaction Curve for Further Addition of Antigen
Enter the following prozone check parameters:
Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4;
Prozone limit: PC;
Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS

When Antigen is selected, first edit box of ABS field and the Q3/Q4 fields on the
Basics window of the Test page are not available.
170> ＝q2≥102>q1≥Reaction end point. 102 is the last measuring point before
sample is added again.
Sample PC＝Aq2-k×Aq1,
Where, k is the volume correction factor.
For single-reagent test: k＝(VR1+VS)/(VR1+2VS);
For double-reagent test: k＝(VR1+VS+VR2)/( VR1+2VS+VR2).
If PC<PCM in increased reaction or PC>PCM in decreased reaction, “PRO” flag is

marked.
11.2.2 Reaction Rate Method

Figure11-21 Antibody Excess Reaction Curve
Figure11-22 Antigen excess reaction curve
The reaction rate method is based on the specified time, in which antibody excess
reaction can reach equilibrium (Figure11-21) but antigen excess reaction cannot
(Figure11-22). Prozone check is performed using the following parameters:
Measuring points: Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4

Prozone limit: PC;
Absorbance low limit for prozone check: ABS
Aq 4 − Aq 3
q 4 − q3
Sample PC = . If PC>PCM, “PRO” flag is marked.
Aq 2 − Aq1
q 2 − q1
Enter measuring points as follows:
For single-reagent 14<=q1<q2<q3<q4<=Reaction end point<=80.

test,
For 43<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 80.
double-reagent
test,
For triple-reagent 92<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 170;
test,
For 133<=q1<q2<q3<q4<= Reaction end point<= 170.
quadruple-reagent
test,
Prozone check will not be performed if:
(1) End point absorbance A is less than absorbance low limit in increased
reaction or greater than that in decreased reaction;
(2) Absolute value of response R is greater than RCMAX (absolute value of
response of most-concentrated calibrator).

11.3 Serum Index
11.3.1 What is Serum Index
Figure11-23 Absorption Spectrum of Serum Reactant
Figure11-23 shows three absorption spectrums of serum samples.
Curve 1 is of the ideal serum without any disturbance.

Curve 2 is of the serum with chromophores like icterus, hemolysis and lipemia.
Curve 3 is of the serum that contains small bubbles or suspending particles.
Small bubbles and suspending particles, which are not sensitive to wavelength and
may only cause the absorption spectrum to translate increasingly (Curve 3), can be
removed using double wavelength method. However, the disturbance such as icterus,
hemolysis and lipemia, which are very sensitive to wavelength and cause the
absorption spectrum to be complex (Figure11-24), cannot be eliminated with double
wavelength method, thus leading to false results.

Figure11-24 Absorption Spectrum of Icterus, Hemolysis and Lipemia
Serum index is the level of hemolysis, icterus and lipemia in serum samples, and can
be employed to judge whether the sample can be used or a sample blank is needed.
11.3.2 Calculation of Serum Index

Calculation of serum index for single-reagent test is shown below.
Sample: Serum;
th th
Reagent: Physiological saline. The average of absorbance at 4 -8 measuring
points after sample dispensing should be used to calculate serum index.
You should enter the serum factors (A, B, C, D, E, F) and thresholds for lipemia,
hemolysis and icterus.
Figure11-25 Settings of Serum Factors and Thresholds

The serum index is calculated as follows:
Six wavelengths (n=450, 505, 570, 605, 670, 700) are selected to determine the
serum index.
Calculation of turbidity index (lipemia): Primary wavelength: 600, secondary

wavelength: 700
AL = A600 − A700 , turbidity index: L = 1 / C × AL ;
Calculation of hemolysis index: Primary wavelength: 570, secondary wavelength:

605
AH = A570 − A605 , hemolysis index: H = 1 / A × ( AH − B × AL ) ;
Calculation of icterus index: Primary wavelength: 450, secondary wavelength:

505
AI = A450 − A505 , icterus index: I = 1 / D × ( AI − E × AH − F × AL ) .

P/N: BA40-20-61898(5.0)

BS-400 (v5 0)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BS-400 (v5 0)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BS-400/BS-420

Intellectual Property Statement

Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this

the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this

This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained

This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or

any product of any other manufacturer.

What Can You Find in This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

In this manual, the signal words BIOHAZARD, WARNING, CAUTION

When you see… Then…

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Read the statement following the symbol. The

Labels Used On the System

CE marking. The device is fully in conformity with the

In Vitro diagnostic equipment

Biohazard warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection

Warning: Risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Warning: risk of burn

Caution: laser radiation

Protective ground terminal

OFF (Main Power)

COM Serial Port

Preventing Electric Shock

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Moving Parts

Preventing Personal Injury Caused by Photometer Lamp

Handling Reagents and Wash Solution

Treating Waste Liquids

Treating Waste Analyzer

Preventing Fire or Explosion

Operating the System

Setting up the System

Computer and Printer

Figure 1-1 Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit

1 System Description 1-1

Figure 1-2 Layout of the system panel

1-2 1 System Description

1. All mechanical units are initialized.

5. R1 is incubated in reaction cuvette for several periods.

9. In case of double-reagent tests, when sample is dispensed, the reagent disk

1 System Description 1-3

13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis

Table 1-1 Functions of system units

1-4 1 System Description

2.1 Technical Specifications

Random, multi-channel, multi-test

Analyzing unit plus Operation unit(PC)

Serum, urine and plasma

Number of simultaneous measurements

38 double-reagent tests/77 single-reagent tests

560 tests/hour with ISE unit

Endpoint, Kinetic, Fixed-time;

2 System Performance and Workflow 2-1

Supporting single-/double-wavelength tests

Clinical chemistries, immunoassays, TDM (Therapeutic Drug Monitoring)

Dilution ratio < 150. Dilution is done in reaction cuvette.

l×b×h:1180 mm×700 mm×1145 mm.